diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf | bin | 659184 -> 663310 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtrantools_doc.txt | 20 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/README | 59 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/README.tools | 50 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_adv.tex | 142 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_conf.tex | 84 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_conf_compsoc.tex | 605 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl.tex | 100 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex | 141 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl_transmag.tex | 101 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/changelog.txt | 28 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/tools/changelog.txt | 104 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtran.cls | 2107 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtrantools.sty | 933 |
14 files changed, 3633 insertions, 841 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf Binary files differindex 5c87d30976f..356be1e5141 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtrantools_doc.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtrantools_doc.txt index f38ec4f31e8..9dd642f8eae 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtrantools_doc.txt +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtrantools_doc.txt @@ -1,10 +1,10 @@ -IEEEtrantools_doc.txt 2012/12/27 version 1.3 -(Version 1.3 is based on the commands of version 1.8 of IEEEtran.cls) +IEEEtrantools_doc.txt 2014/09/17 version 1.4 +(Version 1.4 is based on the commands of version 1.8a of IEEEtran.cls) This document is the user guide for the IEEEtrantools.sty package. The IEEEtrantools.sty package provides several popular and unique -commands from the IEEEtran.cls class (version 1.8) file. +commands from the IEEEtran.cls class (version 1.8a) file. IEEEtrantools.sty should not be used with IEEEtran.cls. @@ -14,9 +14,9 @@ visit the IEEEtrantools support page at my website: http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/tools/ The latest version and documentation of IEEEtrantools can be obtained at: -http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/ +http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/ -Copyright (c) 2002-2012 by Michael Shell +Copyright (c) 2002-2014 by Michael Shell See http://www.michaelshell.org/ for current contact information. @@ -236,9 +236,9 @@ http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/ *** The IEEEeqnarray family *** Please note that IEEEtrantools provides and sets the length variable -\IEEEnormaljot. As IEEEtrantools is loaded, \IEEEnormaljot will be set to -the current value of \jot. If the user later alters the document's nominal -\jot the value of \IEEEnormaljot should be revised as well. +\IEEEnormaljot. At the \begin{document}, \IEEEnormaljot will be set to +the current value of \jot. If the user later alters the document's +nominal \jot, the value of \IEEEnormaljot should be revised as well. The support commands for the IEEEeqnarray commands (\IEEEstrut, \IEEEeqnarrayvrule, \IEEEvisiblestrutstrue, etc.) are also provided. @@ -247,9 +247,9 @@ For more information on the use of the IEEEeqnarray family of commands, the following sources of information are recommended: 1. The IEEEtran HOWTO manual (IEEEeqnarray is covered in the Appendices): - http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/ + http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/ - 2. Stephan M. Moser's "How to Typeset Equations in LaTeX" + 2. Stefan M. Moser's "How to Typeset Equations in LaTeX" http://moser.cm.nctu.edu.tw/manuals.html#eqlatex 3. Tobias Oetiker's "The Not So Short Introduction to LaTeX2e" diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/README index 7d388162da3..561a8bedf14 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/README +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/README @@ -1,12 +1,12 @@ -December 27, 2012 +September 17, 2014 IEEEtran is a LaTeX class for authors of the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) transactions journals and conferences. The latest version of the IEEEtran package can be found at CTAN: -http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/ +http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/ as well as within IEEE's site: @@ -18,39 +18,21 @@ website: http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/ -V1.8 is a significant update over the 1.7a release. For a full list of -changes, please read the file changelog.txt. The most notable changes -include: - - - 1) New transmag class option to support the IEEE Transactions on Magnetics - format. Thanks to Wei Yingkang, Sangmin Suh and Benjamin Gaussens - for suggestions and beta testing. - - 2) The \IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext and - \IEEEdisplaynotcompsoctitleabstractindextext - commands have been deprecated in favor of their - \IEEEtitleabstractindextext and \IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext - (observe that the "not" has changed to "non") equivalents. This change - generalizes and decouples them from compsoc mode because the new - transmag mode also uses them now. - - 3) Added new *-forms of \IEEEyesnumber*, \IEEEnonumber*, \IEEEyessubnumber*, - and \IEEEnosubnumber* (the non-star form of the latter is also new) which - persist across IEEEeqnarray lines until countermanded. To provide for - continued subequations across instances of IEEEeqnarrays as well as for - subequations that follow a main equation (e.g., 14, 14a, 14b ...) - \IEEEyessubnumber no longer automatically increments the equation number - on it's first invocation of a subequation group. Invoke both - \IEEEyesnumber\IEEEyessubnumber together to start a new - equation/subequation group. - - 4) Hyperref links now work with IEEEeqnarray equations. - Thanks to Stefan M. Moser for reporting this problem. - - 5) Revised spacing at top of top figures and tables to better - align with the top main text lines as IEEE does in its journals. - Thanks to Dirk Beyer for reporting this issue and beta testing. +Version 1.8a has a number of significant changes over the v1.8 release. +For a full list of changes, please read the file changelog.txt. The most +notable changes include: + + + 1) Extensive rework of the compsoc mode to comply with the latest standards + of the IEEE Computer Society. + + 2) Fixed abstract, index terms and diamond line for compsoc technotes. + + 3) New \IEEEraisesectionheading{} command to provide for the special + raised first section heading of Computer Society journal papers. + + 4) Internal code improvements for page setup and command argument + processing. Best wishes for all your publication endeavors, @@ -83,6 +65,9 @@ IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf - The IEEEtran LaTeX class user manual. bare_conf.tex - A bare bones starter file for conference papers. +bare_conf_compsoc.tex - A bare bones starter file for Computer Society + conference papers. + bare_jrnl.tex - A bare bones starter file for journal papers. bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex - A bare bones starter file for Computer Society @@ -120,6 +105,6 @@ Retain all contribution notices and credits. ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. ** File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex, - bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex, - bare_jrnl_transmag.tex + bare_conf.tex, bare_conf_compsoc.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, + bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex, bare_jrnl_transmag.tex *************************************************************************** diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/README.tools b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/README.tools index 78fd31cc499..c09a1d3e832 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/README.tools +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/README.tools @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ -December 27, 2012 +September 17, 2014 The IEEEtrantools.sty package provides several commands from the @@ -42,49 +42,11 @@ http://www.michaelshell.org/ ******* -12/2012 V1.3 (V1.8 of IEEEtran.cls) changes: - - 1) No longer redefines the standard LaTeX itemize, enumerate and - description (IED) lists by default. (e.g., the older package option - "retainorgcmds" is now the default behavior.) A new package option, - "redeflists", can be invoked to redefine the standard IED list - environments to their IEEE versions. IEEEitemize, IEEEenumerate and - IEEEdescription remain available in any case. The redeflists option - may not be compatible with other packages that alter the standard - IED list environments. - - 2) Added new *-forms of \IEEEyesnumber*, \IEEEnonumber*, \IEEEyessubnumber*, - and \IEEEnosubnumber* (the non-star form of the latter is also new) which - persist across IEEEeqnarray lines until countermanded. To provide for - continued subequations across instances of IEEEeqnarrays as well as for - subequations that follow a main equation (e.g., 14, 14a, 14b ...) - \IEEEyessubnumber no longer automatically increments the equation number - on it's first invocation of a subequation group. Invoke both - \IEEEyesnumber\IEEEyessubnumber together to start a new - equation/subequation group. - - 3) Hyperref links now work with IEEEeqnarray equations. - Thanks to Stefan M. Moser for reporting this problem. - - 4) Now provides the IEEEproof environment, as well as the - \IEEEQEDhere, \IEEEQEDhereeqn and \IEEEQEDoff commands. - Also, \IEEEproofindentspace allows users to change the - IEEEproof indentation via \renewcommand. - Thanks to Mark D. Butala, Hennadiy Leontyev and Stefan M. Moser - for suggesting this. Special thanks to Stefan M. Moser for beta - testing and additional suggestions which improved IEEEproof. - - 5) Revised \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{} to allow inner alignments without - requiring extra containing braces to prevent an incomplete \ifx error. - Thanks to Stefan M. Moser and Auke van der Valk for reporting this - problem. - - 6) Added \IEEEauthorrefmark. - - 7) Removed support for legacy IED list commands. - IEEEtrantools no longer defines or references \labelindent so as to - avoid namespace problems with list packages that define it. - Thanks to Sven Köhler for reporting the problem with enumitem.sty. +2014/09/17 V1.4 (V1.8a of IEEEtran.cls) changes: + + 1) Internal code improvements for command argument processing and + support for future features. + ********************************** Files ********************************** diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_adv.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_adv.tex index 7609665fcc6..9ac16473f99 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_adv.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_adv.tex @@ -1,14 +1,14 @@ %% bare_adv.tex -%% V1.4 -%% 2012/12/27 +%% V1.4a +%% 2014/09/17 %% by Michael Shell %% See: %% http://www.michaelshell.org/ %% for current contact information. %% %% This is a skeleton file demonstrating the advanced use of IEEEtran.cls -%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8 or later) with an IEEE Computer +%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8a or later) with an IEEE Computer %% Society journal paper. %% %% Support sites: @@ -41,19 +41,19 @@ %% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. ** %% %% File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex, -%% bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex, -%% bare_jrnl_transmag.tex +%% bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_conf_compsoc.tex, +%% bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex, bare_jrnl_transmag.tex %%************************************************************************* + % *** Authors should verify (and, if needed, correct) their LaTeX system *** % *** with the testflow diagnostic prior to trusting their LaTeX platform *** -% *** with production work. IEEE's font choices can trigger bugs that do *** -% *** not appear when using other class files. *** +% *** with production work. IEEE's font choices and paper sizes can *** +% *** trigger bugs that do not appear when using other class files. *** *** % The testflow support page is at: % http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/testflow/ - % IEEEtran V1.7 and later provides for these CLASSINPUT macros to allow the % user to reprogram some IEEEtran.cls defaults if needed. These settings % override the internal defaults of IEEEtran.cls regardless of which class @@ -68,19 +68,9 @@ -% Note that the a4paper option is mainly intended so that authors in -% countries using A4 can easily print to A4 and see how their papers will -% look in print - the typesetting of the document will not typically be -% affected with changes in paper size (but the bottom and side margins will). -% Use the testflow package mentioned above to verify correct handling of -% both paper sizes by the user's LaTeX system. -% -% Also note that the "draftcls" or "draftclsnofoot", not "draft", option -% should be used if it is desired that the figures are to be displayed in -% draft mode. + % -\documentclass[12pt,journal,compsoc]{IEEEtran} -% The Computer Society requires 12pt. +\documentclass[10pt,journal,compsoc]{IEEEtran} % If IEEEtran.cls has not been installed into the LaTeX system files, % manually specify the path to it like: % \documentclass[10pt,journal,compsoc]{../sty/IEEEtran} @@ -128,10 +118,10 @@ \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc % IEEE Computer Society needs nocompress option % requires cite.sty v4.0 or later (November 2003) - % \usepackage[nocompress]{cite} + \usepackage[nocompress]{cite} \else % normal IEEE - % \usepackage{cite} + \usepackage{cite} \fi % cite.sty was written by Donald Arseneau % V1.6 and later of IEEEtran pre-defines the format of the cite.sty package @@ -143,8 +133,7 @@ % noadjust option (cite.sty V3.8 and later) if you want to turn this off % such as if a citation ever needs to be enclosed in parenthesis. % cite.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. Be sure and use -% version 4.0 (2003-05-27) and later if using hyperref.sty. cite.sty does -% not currently provide for hyperlinked citations. +% version 5.0 (2009-03-20) and later if using hyperref.sty. % The latest version can be obtained at: % http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/cite/ % The documentation is contained in the cite.sty file itself. @@ -156,9 +145,6 @@ % (e.g., [1], [2], [3], [4]). To get the latter we need to load the cite % package with the nocompress option which is supported by cite.sty v4.0 % and later. -% -% Note also the use of a CLASSOPTION conditional provided by -% IEEEtran.cls V1.7 and later. @@ -313,7 +299,7 @@ % *** SUBFIGURE PACKAGES *** %\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc -% \usepackage[caption=false,font=normalsize,labelfont=sf,textfont=sf]{subfig} +% \usepackage[caption=false,font=footnotesize,labelfont=sf,textfont=sf]{subfig} %\else % \usepackage[caption=false,font=footnotesize]{subfig} %\fi @@ -326,10 +312,10 @@ % and invoke subfig.sty's "caption=false" package option (available since % subfig.sty version 1.3, 2005/06/28) as this is will preserve IEEEtran.cls % handling of captions. -% Note that the Computer Society format requires a larger sans serif font -% than the serif footnote size font used in traditional IEEE formatting -% and thus the need to invoke different subfig.sty package options depending -% on whether compsoc mode has been enabled. +% Note that the Computer Society format requires a sans serif font rather +% than the serif font used in traditional IEEE formatting and thus the need +% to invoke different subfig.sty package options depending on whether +% compsoc mode has been enabled. % % The latest version and documentation of subfig.sty can be obtained at: % http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/subfig/ @@ -543,7 +529,10 @@ pdfkeywords={Computer Society, IEEEtran, journal, LaTeX, paper, \begin{document} % % paper title -% can use linebreaks \\ within to get better formatting as desired +% Titles are generally capitalized except for words such as a, an, and, as, +% at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to and up, which are usually +% not capitalized unless they are the first or last word of the title. +% Linebreaks \\ can be used within to get better formatting as desired. % Do not put math or special symbols in the title. \title{Bare Advanced Demo of IEEEtran.cls\\ for Computer Society Journals} % @@ -579,7 +568,7 @@ GA, 30332.\protect\\ % \\ is fragile and will error, could use \hfil\break instead. E-mail: see http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html \IEEEcompsocthanksitem J. Doe and J. Doe are with Anonymous University.}% <-this % stops a space -\thanks{Manuscript received April 19, 2005; revised December 27, 2012.}} +\thanks{Manuscript received April 19, 2005; revised September 17, 2014.}} % note the % following the last \IEEEmembership and also \thanks - % these prevent an unwanted space from occurring between the last author name @@ -602,7 +591,7 @@ E-mail: see http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html % The paper headers -\markboth{Journal of \LaTeX\ Class Files,~Vol.~11, No.~4, December~2012}% +\markboth{Journal of \LaTeX\ Class Files,~Vol.~13, No.~9, September~2014}% {Shell \MakeLowercase{\textit{et al.}}: Bare Advanced Demo of IEEEtran.cls for Journals} % The only time the second header will appear is for the odd numbered pages % after the title page when using the twoside option. @@ -620,9 +609,9 @@ E-mail: see http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html % journals, the available text space is not reduced by their presence. % If you want to put a publisher's ID mark on the page you can do it like % this: -%\IEEEpubid{0000--0000/00\$00.00~\copyright~2012 IEEE} +%\IEEEpubid{0000--0000/00\$00.00~\copyright~2014 IEEE} % or like this to get the Computer Society new two part style. -%\IEEEpubid{\makebox[\columnwidth]{\hfill 0000--0000/00/\$00.00~\copyright~2012 IEEE}% +%\IEEEpubid{\makebox[\columnwidth]{\hfill 0000--0000/00/\$00.00~\copyright~2014 IEEE}% %\hspace{\columnsep}\makebox[\columnwidth]{Published by the IEEE Computer Society\hfill}} % Remember, if you use this you must call \IEEEpubidadjcol in the second % column for its text to clear the IEEEpubid mark (Computer Society journal @@ -678,26 +667,20 @@ Computer Society, IEEEtran, journal, \LaTeX, paper, template. \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle - +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +\IEEEraisesectionheading{\section{Introduction}\label{sec:introduction}} +\else \section{Introduction} -% Computer Society journal papers do something a tad strange with the very -% first section heading (almost always called "Introduction"). They place it -% ABOVE the main text! IEEEtran.cls currently does not do this for you. -% However, You can achieve this effect by making LaTeX jump through some -% hoops via something like: -% -%\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc -% \noindent\raisebox{2\baselineskip}[0pt][0pt]% -% {\parbox{\columnwidth}{\section{Introduction}\label{sec:introduction}% -% \global\everypar=\everypar}}% -% \vspace{-1\baselineskip}\vspace{-\parskip}\par -%\else -% \section{Introduction}\label{sec:introduction}\par -%\fi -% -% Admittedly, this is a hack and may well be fragile, but seems to do the -% trick for me. Note the need to keep any \label that may be used right -% after \section in the above as the hack puts \section within a raised box. +\label{sec:introduction} +\fi +% Computer Society journal (but not conference!) papers do something unusual +% with the very first section heading (almost always called "Introduction"). +% They place it ABOVE the main text! IEEEtran.cls does not automatically do +% this for you, but you can achieve this effect with the provided +% \IEEEraisesectionheading{} command. Note the need to keep any \label that +% is to refer to the section immediately after \section in the above as +% \IEEEraisesectionheading puts \section within a raised box. + @@ -718,14 +701,14 @@ Computer Society, IEEEtran, journal, \LaTeX, paper, template. % and "HIS" in caps to complete the first word. \IEEEPARstart{T}{his} demo file is intended to serve as a ``starter file'' for IEEE Computer Society journal papers produced under \LaTeX\ using -IEEEtran.cls version 1.8 and later. +IEEEtran.cls version 1.8a and later. % You must have at least 2 lines in the paragraph with the drop letter % (should never be an issue) I wish you the best of success. \hfill mds -\hfill December 27, 2012 +\hfill September 17, 2014 \subsection{Subsection Heading Here} Subsection text here. @@ -756,7 +739,7 @@ Subsubsection text here. % where an .eps filename suffix will be assumed under latex, % and a .pdf suffix will be assumed for pdflatex; or what has been declared % via \DeclareGraphicsExtensions. -%\caption{Simulation Results.} +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.} %\label{fig_sim} %\end{figure} @@ -780,18 +763,26 @@ Subsubsection text here. %\hfil %\subfloat[Case II]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}% %\label{fig_second_case}} -%\caption{Simulation results.} +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.} %\label{fig_sim} %\end{figure*} % % Note that often IEEE papers with subfigures do not employ subfigure % captions (using the optional argument to \subfloat[]), but instead will % reference/describe all of them (a), (b), etc., within the main caption. - - -% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the -% \caption command should come BEFORE the table. Table text will default to -% \footnotesize as IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables. +% Be aware that for subfig.sty to generate the (a), (b), etc., subfigure +% labels, the optional argument to \subfloat must be present. If a +% subcaption is not desired, just leave its contents blank, +% e.g., \subfloat[]. + + +% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the +% \caption command should come BEFORE the table and, given that table +% captions serve much like titles, are usually capitalized except for words +% such as a, an, and, as, at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to +% and up, which are usually not capitalized unless they are the first or +% last word of the caption. Table text will default to \footnotesize as +% IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables. % The \label must come after \caption as always. % %\begin{table}[!t] @@ -814,15 +805,16 @@ Subsubsection text here. %\end{table} -% Note that IEEE does not put floats in the very first column - or typically -% anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also, in-text middle ("here") -% positioning is not used. Most IEEE journals use top floats exclusively. -% However, Computer Society journals sometimes do use bottom floats - bear -% this in mind when choosing appropriate optional arguments for the -% figure/table environments. -% Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals, places footnotes above bottom -% floats. This can be corrected via the \fnbelowfloat command of the -% stfloats package. +% Note that the IEEE does not put floats in the very first column +% - or typically anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also, +% in-text middle ("here") positioning is typically not used, but it +% is allowed and encouraged for Computer Society conferences (but +% not Computer Society journals). Most IEEE journals/conferences use +% top floats exclusively. +% Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals/conferences, places +% footnotes above bottom floats. This can be corrected via the +% \fnbelowfloat command of the stfloats package. + @@ -858,7 +850,7 @@ Appendix one text goes here. Appendix two text goes here. -% use section* for acknowledgement +% use section* for acknowledgment \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc % The Computer Society usually uses the plural form \section*{Acknowledgments} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_conf.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_conf.tex index d87c598d2ad..b37a6a3f114 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_conf.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_conf.tex @@ -1,14 +1,15 @@ %% bare_conf.tex -%% V1.4 -%% 2012/12/27 +%% V1.4a +%% 2014/09/17 %% by Michael Shell %% See: %% http://www.michaelshell.org/ %% for current contact information. %% %% This is a skeleton file demonstrating the use of IEEEtran.cls -%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8 or later) with an IEEE conference paper. +%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8a or later) with an IEEE +%% conference paper. %% %% Support sites: %% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/ @@ -40,32 +41,23 @@ %% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. ** %% %% File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex, -%% bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex, -%% bare_jrnl_transmag.tex +%% bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_conf_compsoc.tex, +%% bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex, bare_jrnl_transmag.tex %%************************************************************************* + % *** Authors should verify (and, if needed, correct) their LaTeX system *** % *** with the testflow diagnostic prior to trusting their LaTeX platform *** -% *** with production work. IEEE's font choices can trigger bugs that do *** -% *** not appear when using other class files. *** +% *** with production work. IEEE's font choices and paper sizes can *** +% *** trigger bugs that do not appear when using other class files. *** *** % The testflow support page is at: % http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/testflow/ -% Note that the a4paper option is mainly intended so that authors in -% countries using A4 can easily print to A4 and see how their papers will -% look in print - the typesetting of the document will not typically be -% affected with changes in paper size (but the bottom and side margins will). -% Use the testflow package mentioned above to verify correct handling of -% both paper sizes by the user's LaTeX system. -% -% Also note that the "draftcls" or "draftclsnofoot", not "draft", option -% should be used if it is desired that the figures are to be displayed in -% draft mode. -% \documentclass[conference]{IEEEtran} -% Add the compsoc option for Computer Society conferences. +% Some Computer Society conferences also require the compsoc mode option, +% but others use the standard conference format. % % If IEEEtran.cls has not been installed into the LaTeX system files, % manually specify the path to it like: @@ -115,8 +107,7 @@ % noadjust option (cite.sty V3.8 and later) if you want to turn this off % such as if a citation ever needs to be enclosed in parenthesis. % cite.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. Be sure and use -% version 4.0 (2003-05-27) and later if using hyperref.sty. cite.sty does -% not currently provide for hyperlinked citations. +% version 5.0 (2009-03-20) and later if using hyperref.sty. % The latest version can be obtained at: % http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/cite/ % The documentation is contained in the cite.sty file itself. @@ -330,7 +321,10 @@ \begin{document} % % paper title -% can use linebreaks \\ within to get better formatting as desired +% Titles are generally capitalized except for words such as a, an, and, as, +% at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to and up, which are usually +% not capitalized unless they are the first or last word of the title. +% Linebreaks \\ can be used within to get better formatting as desired. % Do not put math or special symbols in the title. \title{Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls for Conferences} @@ -351,7 +345,7 @@ Email: homer@thesimpsons.com} \and \IEEEauthorblockN{James Kirk\\ and Montgomery Scott} \IEEEauthorblockA{Starfleet Academy\\ -San Francisco, California 96678-2391\\ +San Francisco, California 96678--2391\\ Telephone: (800) 555--1212\\ Fax: (888) 555--1212}} @@ -416,14 +410,14 @@ The abstract goes here. % no \IEEEPARstart This demo file is intended to serve as a ``starter file'' for IEEE conference papers produced under \LaTeX\ using -IEEEtran.cls version 1.8 and later. +IEEEtran.cls version 1.8a and later. % You must have at least 2 lines in the paragraph with the drop letter % (should never be an issue) I wish you the best of success. \hfill mds -\hfill December 27, 2012 +\hfill September 17, 2014 \subsection{Subsection Heading Here} Subsection text here. @@ -452,7 +446,7 @@ Subsubsection text here. % where an .eps filename suffix will be assumed under latex, % and a .pdf suffix will be assumed for pdflatex; or what has been declared % via \DeclareGraphicsExtensions. -%\caption{Simulation Results.} +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.} %\label{fig_sim} %\end{figure} @@ -475,18 +469,26 @@ Subsubsection text here. %\hfil %\subfloat[Case II]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}% %\label{fig_second_case}} -%\caption{Simulation results.} +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.} %\label{fig_sim} %\end{figure*} % % Note that often IEEE papers with subfigures do not employ subfigure % captions (using the optional argument to \subfloat[]), but instead will % reference/describe all of them (a), (b), etc., within the main caption. - - -% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the -% \caption command should come BEFORE the table. Table text will default to -% \footnotesize as IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables. +% Be aware that for subfig.sty to generate the (a), (b), etc., subfigure +% labels, the optional argument to \subfloat must be present. If a +% subcaption is not desired, just leave its contents blank, +% e.g., \subfloat[]. + + +% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the +% \caption command should come BEFORE the table and, given that table +% captions serve much like titles, are usually capitalized except for words +% such as a, an, and, as, at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to +% and up, which are usually not capitalized unless they are the first or +% last word of the caption. Table text will default to \footnotesize as +% IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables. % The \label must come after \caption as always. % %\begin{table}[!t] @@ -509,12 +511,16 @@ Subsubsection text here. %\end{table} -% Note that IEEE does not put floats in the very first column - or typically -% anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also, in-text middle ("here") -% positioning is not used. Most IEEE journals/conferences use top floats -% exclusively. Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals/conferences, places -% footnotes above bottom floats. This can be corrected via the \fnbelowfloat -% command of the stfloats package. +% Note that the IEEE does not put floats in the very first column +% - or typically anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also, +% in-text middle ("here") positioning is typically not used, but it +% is allowed and encouraged for Computer Society conferences (but +% not Computer Society journals). Most IEEE journals/conferences use +% top floats exclusively. +% Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals/conferences, places +% footnotes above bottom floats. This can be corrected via the +% \fnbelowfloat command of the stfloats package. + @@ -527,7 +533,7 @@ The conclusion goes here. % conference papers do not normally have an appendix -% use section* for acknowledgement +% use section* for acknowledgment \section*{Acknowledgment} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_conf_compsoc.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_conf_compsoc.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b26a88e795e --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_conf_compsoc.tex @@ -0,0 +1,605 @@ + +%% bare_conf_compsoc.tex +%% V1.4a +%% 2014/09/17 +%% by Michael Shell +%% See: +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/ +%% for current contact information. +%% +%% This is a skeleton file demonstrating the use of IEEEtran.cls +%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8s or later) with an IEEE Computer +%% Society conference paper. +%% +%% Support sites: +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/ +%% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/ +%% and +%% http://www.ieee.org/ + +%%************************************************************************* +%% Legal Notice: +%% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or +%% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or +%% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE! +%% User assumes all risk. +%% In no event shall IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for +%% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental, +%% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse +%% of any information contained here. +%% +%% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not +%% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE. +%% +%% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) +%% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used, +%% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included +%% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released +%% 2003/12/01 or later. +%% Retain all contribution notices and credits. +%% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including ** +%% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. ** +%% +%% File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex, +%% bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_conf_compsoc.tex, +%% bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex, bare_jrnl_transmag.tex +%%************************************************************************* + + +% *** Authors should verify (and, if needed, correct) their LaTeX system *** +% *** with the testflow diagnostic prior to trusting their LaTeX platform *** +% *** with production work. IEEE's font choices and paper sizes can *** +% *** trigger bugs that do not appear when using other class files. *** *** +% The testflow support page is at: +% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/testflow/ + + + +\documentclass[conference,compsoc]{IEEEtran} +% Some/most Computer Society conferences require the compsoc mode option, +% but others may want the standard conference format. +% +% If IEEEtran.cls has not been installed into the LaTeX system files, +% manually specify the path to it like: +% \documentclass[conference,compsoc]{../sty/IEEEtran} + + + + + +% Some very useful LaTeX packages include: +% (uncomment the ones you want to load) + + +% *** MISC UTILITY PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{ifpdf} +% Heiko Oberdiek's ifpdf.sty is very useful if you need conditional +% compilation based on whether the output is pdf or dvi. +% usage: +% \ifpdf +% % pdf code +% \else +% % dvi code +% \fi +% The latest version of ifpdf.sty can be obtained from: +% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/oberdiek/ +% Also, note that IEEEtran.cls V1.7 and later provides a builtin +% \ifCLASSINFOpdf conditional that works the same way. +% When switching from latex to pdflatex and vice-versa, the compiler may +% have to be run twice to clear warning/error messages. + + + + + + +% *** CITATION PACKAGES *** +% +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc + % IEEE Computer Society needs nocompress option + % requires cite.sty v4.0 or later (November 2003) + \usepackage[nocompress]{cite} +\else + % normal IEEE + \usepackage{cite} +\fi +% cite.sty was written by Donald Arseneau +% V1.6 and later of IEEEtran pre-defines the format of the cite.sty package +% \cite{} output to follow that of IEEE. Loading the cite package will +% result in citation numbers being automatically sorted and properly +% "compressed/ranged". e.g., [1], [9], [2], [7], [5], [6] without using +% cite.sty will become [1], [2], [5]--[7], [9] using cite.sty. cite.sty's +% \cite will automatically add leading space, if needed. Use cite.sty's +% noadjust option (cite.sty V3.8 and later) if you want to turn this off +% such as if a citation ever needs to be enclosed in parenthesis. +% cite.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. Be sure and use +% version 5.0 (2009-03-20) and later if using hyperref.sty. +% The latest version can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/cite/ +% The documentation is contained in the cite.sty file itself. +% +% Note that some packages require special options to format as the Computer +% Society requires. In particular, Computer Society papers do not use +% compressed citation ranges as is done in typical IEEE papers +% (e.g., [1]-[4]). Instead, they list every citation separately in order +% (e.g., [1], [2], [3], [4]). To get the latter we need to load the cite +% package with the nocompress option which is supported by cite.sty v4.0 +% and later. + + + + + +% *** GRAPHICS RELATED PACKAGES *** +% +\ifCLASSINFOpdf + % \usepackage[pdftex]{graphicx} + % declare the path(s) where your graphic files are + % \graphicspath{{../pdf/}{../jpeg/}} + % and their extensions so you won't have to specify these with + % every instance of \includegraphics + % \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.pdf,.jpeg,.png} +\else + % or other class option (dvipsone, dvipdf, if not using dvips). graphicx + % will default to the driver specified in the system graphics.cfg if no + % driver is specified. + % \usepackage[dvips]{graphicx} + % declare the path(s) where your graphic files are + % \graphicspath{{../eps/}} + % and their extensions so you won't have to specify these with + % every instance of \includegraphics + % \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.eps} +\fi +% graphicx was written by David Carlisle and Sebastian Rahtz. It is +% required if you want graphics, photos, etc. graphicx.sty is already +% installed on most LaTeX systems. The latest version and documentation +% can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/ +% Another good source of documentation is "Using Imported Graphics in +% LaTeX2e" by Keith Reckdahl which can be found at: +% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/epslatex/ +% +% latex, and pdflatex in dvi mode, support graphics in encapsulated +% postscript (.eps) format. pdflatex in pdf mode supports graphics +% in .pdf, .jpeg, .png and .mps (metapost) formats. Users should ensure +% that all non-photo figures use a vector format (.eps, .pdf, .mps) and +% not a bitmapped formats (.jpeg, .png). IEEE frowns on bitmapped formats +% which can result in "jaggedy"/blurry rendering of lines and letters as +% well as large increases in file sizes. +% +% You can find documentation about the pdfTeX application at: +% http://www.tug.org/applications/pdftex + + + + + +% *** MATH PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage[cmex10]{amsmath} +% A popular package from the American Mathematical Society that provides +% many useful and powerful commands for dealing with mathematics. If using +% it, be sure to load this package with the cmex10 option to ensure that +% only type 1 fonts will utilized at all point sizes. Without this option, +% it is possible that some math symbols, particularly those within +% footnotes, will be rendered in bitmap form which will result in a +% document that can not be IEEE Xplore compliant! +% +% Also, note that the amsmath package sets \interdisplaylinepenalty to 10000 +% thus preventing page breaks from occurring within multiline equations. Use: +%\interdisplaylinepenalty=2500 +% after loading amsmath to restore such page breaks as IEEEtran.cls normally +% does. amsmath.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. The latest +% version and documentation can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/amslatex/math/ + + + + + +% *** SPECIALIZED LIST PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{algorithmic} +% algorithmic.sty was written by Peter Williams and Rogerio Brito. +% This package provides an algorithmic environment fo describing algorithms. +% You can use the algorithmic environment in-text or within a figure +% environment to provide for a floating algorithm. Do NOT use the algorithm +% floating environment provided by algorithm.sty (by the same authors) or +% algorithm2e.sty (by Christophe Fiorio) as IEEE does not use dedicated +% algorithm float types and packages that provide these will not provide +% correct IEEE style captions. The latest version and documentation of +% algorithmic.sty can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/algorithms/ +% There is also a support site at: +% http://algorithms.berlios.de/index.html +% Also of interest may be the (relatively newer and more customizable) +% algorithmicx.sty package by Szasz Janos: +% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/algorithmicx/ + + + + +% *** ALIGNMENT PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{array} +% Frank Mittelbach's and David Carlisle's array.sty patches and improves +% the standard LaTeX2e array and tabular environments to provide better +% appearance and additional user controls. As the default LaTeX2e table +% generation code is lacking to the point of almost being broken with +% respect to the quality of the end results, all users are strongly +% advised to use an enhanced (at the very least that provided by array.sty) +% set of table tools. array.sty is already installed on most systems. The +% latest version and documentation can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/tools/ + + +% IEEEtran contains the IEEEeqnarray family of commands that can be used to +% generate multiline equations as well as matrices, tables, etc., of high +% quality. + + + + +% *** SUBFIGURE PACKAGES *** +%\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +% \usepackage[caption=false,font=footnotesize,labelfont=sf,textfont=sf]{subfig} +%\else +% \usepackage[caption=false,font=footnotesize]{subfig} +%\fi +% subfig.sty, written by Steven Douglas Cochran, is the modern replacement +% for subfigure.sty, the latter of which is no longer maintained and is +% incompatible with some LaTeX packages including fixltx2e. However, +% subfig.sty requires and automatically loads Axel Sommerfeldt's caption.sty +% which will override IEEEtran.cls' handling of captions and this will result +% in non-IEEE style figure/table captions. To prevent this problem, be sure +% and invoke subfig.sty's "caption=false" package option (available since +% subfig.sty version 1.3, 2005/06/28) as this is will preserve IEEEtran.cls +% handling of captions. +% Note that the Computer Society format requires a sans serif font rather +% than the serif font used in traditional IEEE formatting and thus the need +% to invoke different subfig.sty package options depending on whether +% compsoc mode has been enabled. +% +% The latest version and documentation of subfig.sty can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/subfig/ + + + + +% *** FLOAT PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{fixltx2e} +% fixltx2e, the successor to the earlier fix2col.sty, was written by +% Frank Mittelbach and David Carlisle. This package corrects a few problems +% in the LaTeX2e kernel, the most notable of which is that in current +% LaTeX2e releases, the ordering of single and double column floats is not +% guaranteed to be preserved. Thus, an unpatched LaTeX2e can allow a +% single column figure to be placed prior to an earlier double column +% figure. The latest version and documentation can be found at: +% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/base/ + + +%\usepackage{stfloats} +% stfloats.sty was written by Sigitas Tolusis. This package gives LaTeX2e +% the ability to do double column floats at the bottom of the page as well +% as the top. (e.g., "\begin{figure*}[!b]" is not normally possible in +% LaTeX2e). It also provides a command: +%\fnbelowfloat +% to enable the placement of footnotes below bottom floats (the standard +% LaTeX2e kernel puts them above bottom floats). This is an invasive package +% which rewrites many portions of the LaTeX2e float routines. It may not work +% with other packages that modify the LaTeX2e float routines. The latest +% version and documentation can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/sttools/ +% Do not use the stfloats baselinefloat ability as IEEE does not allow +% \baselineskip to stretch. Authors submitting work to the IEEE should note +% that IEEE rarely uses double column equations and that authors should try +% to avoid such use. Do not be tempted to use the cuted.sty or midfloat.sty +% packages (also by Sigitas Tolusis) as IEEE does not format its papers in +% such ways. +% Do not attempt to use stfloats with fixltx2e as they are incompatible. +% Instead, use Morten Hogholm'a dblfloatfix which combines the features +% of both fixltx2e and stfloats: +% +% \usepackage{dblfloatfix} +% The latest version can be found at: +% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/dblfloatfix/ + + + + +% *** PDF, URL AND HYPERLINK PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{url} +% url.sty was written by Donald Arseneau. It provides better support for +% handling and breaking URLs. url.sty is already installed on most LaTeX +% systems. The latest version and documentation can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/url/ +% Basically, \url{my_url_here}. + + + + +% *** Do not adjust lengths that control margins, column widths, etc. *** +% *** Do not use packages that alter fonts (such as pslatex). *** +% There should be no need to do such things with IEEEtran.cls V1.6 and later. +% (Unless specifically asked to do so by the journal or conference you plan +% to submit to, of course. ) + + +% correct bad hyphenation here +\hyphenation{op-tical net-works semi-conduc-tor} + + +\begin{document} +% +% paper title +% Titles are generally capitalized except for words such as a, an, and, as, +% at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to and up, which are usually +% not capitalized unless they are the first or last word of the title. +% Linebreaks \\ can be used within to get better formatting as desired. +% Do not put math or special symbols in the title. +\title{Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls for Computer Society Conferences} + + +% author names and affiliations +% use a multiple column layout for up to three different +% affiliations +\author{\IEEEauthorblockN{Michael Shell} +\IEEEauthorblockA{School of Electrical and\\Computer Engineering\\ +Georgia Institute of Technology\\ +Atlanta, Georgia 30332--0250\\ +Email: http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html} +\and +\IEEEauthorblockN{Homer Simpson} +\IEEEauthorblockA{Twentieth Century Fox\\ +Springfield, USA\\ +Email: homer@thesimpsons.com} +\and +\IEEEauthorblockN{James Kirk\\ and Montgomery Scott} +\IEEEauthorblockA{Starfleet Academy\\ +San Francisco, California 96678-2391\\ +Telephone: (800) 555--1212\\ +Fax: (888) 555--1212}} + +% conference papers do not typically use \thanks and this command +% is locked out in conference mode. If really needed, such as for +% the acknowledgment of grants, issue a \IEEEoverridecommandlockouts +% after \documentclass + +% for over three affiliations, or if they all won't fit within the width +% of the page (and note that there is less available width in this regard for +% compsoc conferences compared to traditional conferences), use this +% alternative format: +% +%\author{\IEEEauthorblockN{Michael Shell\IEEEauthorrefmark{1}, +%Homer Simpson\IEEEauthorrefmark{2}, +%James Kirk\IEEEauthorrefmark{3}, +%Montgomery Scott\IEEEauthorrefmark{3} and +%Eldon Tyrell\IEEEauthorrefmark{4}} +%\IEEEauthorblockA{\IEEEauthorrefmark{1}School of Electrical and Computer Engineering\\ +%Georgia Institute of Technology, +%Atlanta, Georgia 30332--0250\\ Email: see http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html} +%\IEEEauthorblockA{\IEEEauthorrefmark{2}Twentieth Century Fox, Springfield, USA\\ +%Email: homer@thesimpsons.com} +%\IEEEauthorblockA{\IEEEauthorrefmark{3}Starfleet Academy, San Francisco, California 96678-2391\\ +%Telephone: (800) 555--1212, Fax: (888) 555--1212} +%\IEEEauthorblockA{\IEEEauthorrefmark{4}Tyrell Inc., 123 Replicant Street, Los Angeles, California 90210--4321}} + + + + +% use for special paper notices +%\IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)} + + + + +% make the title area +\maketitle + +% As a general rule, do not put math, special symbols or citations +% in the abstract +\begin{abstract} +The abstract goes here. +\end{abstract} + +% no keywords + + + + +% For peer review papers, you can put extra information on the cover +% page as needed: +% \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview +% \begin{center} \bfseries EDICS Category: 3-BBND \end{center} +% \fi +% +% For peerreview papers, this IEEEtran command inserts a page break and +% creates the second title. It will be ignored for other modes. +\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle + + + +\section{Introduction} +% no \IEEEPARstart +This demo file is intended to serve as a ``starter file'' +for IEEE conference papers produced under \LaTeX\ using +IEEEtran.cls version 1.8a and later. +% You must have at least 2 lines in the paragraph with the drop letter +% (should never be an issue) +I wish you the best of success. + +\hfill mds + +\hfill September 17, 2014 + +\subsection{Subsection Heading Here} +Subsection text here. + + +\subsubsection{Subsubsection Heading Here} +Subsubsection text here. + + +% An example of a floating figure using the graphicx package. +% Note that \label must occur AFTER (or within) \caption. +% For figures, \caption should occur after the \includegraphics. +% Note that IEEEtran v1.7 and later has special internal code that +% is designed to preserve the operation of \label within \caption +% even when the captionsoff option is in effect. However, because +% of issues like this, it may be the safest practice to put all your +% \label just after \caption rather than within \caption{}. +% +% Reminder: the "draftcls" or "draftclsnofoot", not "draft", class +% option should be used if it is desired that the figures are to be +% displayed while in draft mode. +% +%\begin{figure}[!t] +%\centering +%\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{myfigure} +% where an .eps filename suffix will be assumed under latex, +% and a .pdf suffix will be assumed for pdflatex; or what has been declared +% via \DeclareGraphicsExtensions. +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.} +%\label{fig_sim} +%\end{figure} + +% Note that IEEE typically puts floats only at the top, even when this +% results in a large percentage of a column being occupied by floats. + + +% An example of a double column floating figure using two subfigures. +% (The subfig.sty package must be loaded for this to work.) +% The subfigure \label commands are set within each subfloat command, +% and the \label for the overall figure must come after \caption. +% \hfil is used as a separator to get equal spacing. +% Watch out that the combined width of all the subfigures on a +% line do not exceed the text width or a line break will occur. +% +%\begin{figure*}[!t] +%\centering +%\subfloat[Case I]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}% +%\label{fig_first_case}} +%\hfil +%\subfloat[Case II]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}% +%\label{fig_second_case}} +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.} +%\label{fig_sim} +%\end{figure*} +% +% Note that often IEEE papers with subfigures do not employ subfigure +% captions (using the optional argument to \subfloat[]), but instead will +% reference/describe all of them (a), (b), etc., within the main caption. +% Be aware that for subfig.sty to generate the (a), (b), etc., subfigure +% labels, the optional argument to \subfloat must be present. If a +% subcaption is not desired, just leave its contents blank, +% e.g., \subfloat[]. + + +% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the +% \caption command should come BEFORE the table and, given that table +% captions serve much like titles, are usually capitalized except for words +% such as a, an, and, as, at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to +% and up, which are usually not capitalized unless they are the first or +% last word of the caption. Table text will default to \footnotesize as +% IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables. +% The \label must come after \caption as always. +% +%\begin{table}[!t] +%% increase table row spacing, adjust to taste +%\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.3} +% if using array.sty, it might be a good idea to tweak the value of +% \extrarowheight as needed to properly center the text within the cells +%\caption{An Example of a Table} +%\label{table_example} +%\centering +%% Some packages, such as MDW tools, offer better commands for making tables +%% than the plain LaTeX2e tabular which is used here. +%\begin{tabular}{|c||c|} +%\hline +%One & Two\\ +%\hline +%Three & Four\\ +%\hline +%\end{tabular} +%\end{table} + + +% Note that the IEEE does not put floats in the very first column +% - or typically anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also, +% in-text middle ("here") positioning is typically not used, but it +% is allowed and encouraged for Computer Society conferences (but +% not Computer Society journals). Most IEEE journals/conferences use +% top floats exclusively. +% Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals/conferences, places +% footnotes above bottom floats. This can be corrected via the +% \fnbelowfloat command of the stfloats package. + + + + +\section{Conclusion} +The conclusion goes here. + + + + +% conference papers do not normally have an appendix + + + +% use section* for acknowledgment +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc + % The Computer Society usually uses the plural form + \section*{Acknowledgments} +\else + % regular IEEE prefers the singular form + \section*{Acknowledgment} +\fi + + +The authors would like to thank... + + + + + +% trigger a \newpage just before the given reference +% number - used to balance the columns on the last page +% adjust value as needed - may need to be readjusted if +% the document is modified later +%\IEEEtriggeratref{8} +% The "triggered" command can be changed if desired: +%\IEEEtriggercmd{\enlargethispage{-5in}} + +% references section + +% can use a bibliography generated by BibTeX as a .bbl file +% BibTeX documentation can be easily obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/ +% The IEEEtran BibTeX style support page is at: +% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/bibtex/ +%\bibliographystyle{IEEEtran} +% argument is your BibTeX string definitions and bibliography database(s) +%\bibliography{IEEEabrv,../bib/paper} +% +% <OR> manually copy in the resultant .bbl file +% set second argument of \begin to the number of references +% (used to reserve space for the reference number labels box) +\begin{thebibliography}{1} + +\bibitem{IEEEhowto:kopka} +H.~Kopka and P.~W. Daly, \emph{A Guide to \LaTeX}, 3rd~ed.\hskip 1em plus + 0.5em minus 0.4em\relax Harlow, England: Addison-Wesley, 1999. + +\end{thebibliography} + + + + +% that's all folks +\end{document} + + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl.tex index a3cea413552..e7b2a990d56 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl.tex @@ -1,13 +1,14 @@ %% bare_jrnl.tex -%% V1.4 -%% 2012/12/27 +%% V1.4a +%% 2014/09/17 %% by Michael Shell %% see http://www.michaelshell.org/ %% for current contact information. %% %% This is a skeleton file demonstrating the use of IEEEtran.cls -%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8 or later) with an IEEE journal paper. +%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8a or later) with an IEEE +%% journal paper. %% %% Support sites: %% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/ @@ -15,16 +16,6 @@ %% and %% http://www.ieee.org/ - - -% *** Authors should verify (and, if needed, correct) their LaTeX system *** -% *** with the testflow diagnostic prior to trusting their LaTeX platform *** -% *** with production work. IEEE's font choices can trigger bugs that do *** -% *** not appear when using other class files. *** -% The testflow support page is at: -% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/testflow/ - - %%************************************************************************* %% Legal Notice: %% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or @@ -49,21 +40,20 @@ %% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. ** %% %% File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex, -%% bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex, -%% bare_jrnl_transmag.tex +%% bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_conf_compsoc.tex, +%% bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex, bare_jrnl_transmag.tex %%************************************************************************* -% Note that the a4paper option is mainly intended so that authors in -% countries using A4 can easily print to A4 and see how their papers will -% look in print - the typesetting of the document will not typically be -% affected with changes in paper size (but the bottom and side margins will). -% Use the testflow package mentioned above to verify correct handling of -% both paper sizes by the user's LaTeX system. -% -% Also note that the "draftcls" or "draftclsnofoot", not "draft", option -% should be used if it is desired that the figures are to be displayed in -% draft mode. -% + +% *** Authors should verify (and, if needed, correct) their LaTeX system *** +% *** with the testflow diagnostic prior to trusting their LaTeX platform *** +% *** with production work. IEEE's font choices and paper sizes can *** +% *** trigger bugs that do not appear when using other class files. *** *** +% The testflow support page is at: +% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/testflow/ + + + \documentclass[journal]{IEEEtran} % % If IEEEtran.cls has not been installed into the LaTeX system files, @@ -114,8 +104,7 @@ % noadjust option (cite.sty V3.8 and later) if you want to turn this off % such as if a citation ever needs to be enclosed in parenthesis. % cite.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. Be sure and use -% version 4.0 (2003-05-27) and later if using hyperref.sty. cite.sty does -% not currently provide for hyperlinked citations. +% version 5.0 (2009-03-20) and later if using hyperref.sty. % The latest version can be obtained at: % http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/cite/ % The documentation is contained in the cite.sty file itself. @@ -370,7 +359,10 @@ \begin{document} % % paper title -% can use linebreaks \\ within to get better formatting as desired +% Titles are generally capitalized except for words such as a, an, and, as, +% at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to and up, which are usually +% not capitalized unless they are the first or last word of the title. +% Linebreaks \\ can be used within to get better formatting as desired. % Do not put math or special symbols in the title. \title{Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls for Journals} % @@ -391,7 +383,7 @@ of Electrical and Computer Engineering, Georgia Institute of Technology, Atlanta, GA, 30332 USA e-mail: (see http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html).}% <-this % stops a space \thanks{J. Doe and J. Doe are with Anonymous University.}% <-this % stops a space -\thanks{Manuscript received April 19, 2005; revised December 27, 2012.}} +\thanks{Manuscript received April 19, 2005; revised September 17, 2014.}} % note the % following the last \IEEEmembership and also \thanks - % these prevent an unwanted space from occurring between the last author name @@ -414,7 +406,7 @@ GA, 30332 USA e-mail: (see http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html).}% <-this % % The paper headers -\markboth{Journal of \LaTeX\ Class Files,~Vol.~11, No.~4, December~2012}% +\markboth{Journal of \LaTeX\ Class Files,~Vol.~13, No.~9, September~2014}% {Shell \MakeLowercase{\textit{et al.}}: Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls for Journals} % The only time the second header will appear is for the odd numbered pages % after the title page when using the twoside option. @@ -429,7 +421,7 @@ GA, 30332 USA e-mail: (see http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html).}% <-this % % If you want to put a publisher's ID mark on the page you can do it like % this: -%\IEEEpubid{0000--0000/00\$00.00~\copyright~2012 IEEE} +%\IEEEpubid{0000--0000/00\$00.00~\copyright~2014 IEEE} % Remember, if you use this you must call \IEEEpubidadjcol in the second % column for its text to clear the IEEEpubid mark. @@ -490,14 +482,14 @@ IEEEtran, journal, \LaTeX, paper, template. % and "HIS" in caps to complete the first word. \IEEEPARstart{T}{his} demo file is intended to serve as a ``starter file'' for IEEE journal papers produced under \LaTeX\ using -IEEEtran.cls version 1.8 and later. +IEEEtran.cls version 1.8a and later. % You must have at least 2 lines in the paragraph with the drop letter % (should never be an issue) I wish you the best of success. \hfill mds -\hfill December 27, 2012 +\hfill September 17, 2014 \subsection{Subsection Heading Here} Subsection text here. @@ -528,7 +520,7 @@ Subsubsection text here. % where an .eps filename suffix will be assumed under latex, % and a .pdf suffix will be assumed for pdflatex; or what has been declared % via \DeclareGraphicsExtensions. -%\caption{Simulation Results.} +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.} %\label{fig_sim} %\end{figure} @@ -551,18 +543,26 @@ Subsubsection text here. %\hfil %\subfloat[Case II]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}% %\label{fig_second_case}} -%\caption{Simulation results.} +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.} %\label{fig_sim} %\end{figure*} % % Note that often IEEE papers with subfigures do not employ subfigure % captions (using the optional argument to \subfloat[]), but instead will % reference/describe all of them (a), (b), etc., within the main caption. - - -% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the -% \caption command should come BEFORE the table. Table text will default to -% \footnotesize as IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables. +% Be aware that for subfig.sty to generate the (a), (b), etc., subfigure +% labels, the optional argument to \subfloat must be present. If a +% subcaption is not desired, just leave its contents blank, +% e.g., \subfloat[]. + + +% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the +% \caption command should come BEFORE the table and, given that table +% captions serve much like titles, are usually capitalized except for words +% such as a, an, and, as, at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to +% and up, which are usually not capitalized unless they are the first or +% last word of the caption. Table text will default to \footnotesize as +% IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables. % The \label must come after \caption as always. % %\begin{table}[!t] @@ -585,12 +585,16 @@ Subsubsection text here. %\end{table} -% Note that IEEE does not put floats in the very first column - or typically -% anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also, in-text middle ("here") -% positioning is not used. Most IEEE journals use top floats exclusively. -% Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals, places footnotes above bottom -% floats. This can be corrected via the \fnbelowfloat command of the -% stfloats package. +% Note that the IEEE does not put floats in the very first column +% - or typically anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also, +% in-text middle ("here") positioning is typically not used, but it +% is allowed and encouraged for Computer Society conferences (but +% not Computer Society journals). Most IEEE journals/conferences use +% top floats exclusively. +% Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals/conferences, places +% footnotes above bottom floats. This can be corrected via the +% \fnbelowfloat command of the stfloats package. + @@ -626,7 +630,7 @@ Appendix one text goes here. Appendix two text goes here. -% use section* for acknowledgement +% use section* for acknowledgment \section*{Acknowledgment} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex index 9096200ab01..fd99722b8ac 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex @@ -1,15 +1,15 @@ %% bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex -%% V1.4 -%% 2012/12/27 +%% V1.4a +%% 2014/09/17 %% by Michael Shell %% See: %% http://www.michaelshell.org/ %% for current contact information. %% %% This is a skeleton file demonstrating the use of IEEEtran.cls -%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8 or later) with an IEEE Computer -%% Society journal paper. +%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8a or later) with an IEEE +%% Computer Society journal paper. %% %% Support sites: %% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/ @@ -41,38 +41,24 @@ %% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. ** %% %% File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex, -%% bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex, -%% bare_jrnl_transmag.tex +%% bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_conf_compsoc.tex, +%% bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex, bare_jrnl_transmag.tex %%************************************************************************* + % *** Authors should verify (and, if needed, correct) their LaTeX system *** % *** with the testflow diagnostic prior to trusting their LaTeX platform *** -% *** with production work. IEEE's font choices can trigger bugs that do *** -% *** not appear when using other class files. *** +% *** with production work. IEEE's font choices and paper sizes can *** +% *** trigger bugs that do not appear when using other class files. *** *** % The testflow support page is at: % http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/testflow/ - - -% Note that the a4paper option is mainly intended so that authors in -% countries using A4 can easily print to A4 and see how their papers will -% look in print - the typesetting of the document will not typically be -% affected with changes in paper size (but the bottom and side margins will). -% Use the testflow package mentioned above to verify correct handling of -% both paper sizes by the user's LaTeX system. -% -% Also note that the "draftcls" or "draftclsnofoot", not "draft", option -% should be used if it is desired that the figures are to be displayed in -% draft mode. -% -% The Computer Society usually requires 12pt for submissions. -% -\documentclass[12pt,journal,compsoc]{IEEEtran} +\documentclass[10pt,journal,compsoc]{IEEEtran} % % If IEEEtran.cls has not been installed into the LaTeX system files, % manually specify the path to it like: -% \documentclass[12pt,journal,compsoc]{../sty/IEEEtran} +% \documentclass[10pt,journal,compsoc]{../sty/IEEEtran} @@ -110,10 +96,10 @@ \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc % IEEE Computer Society needs nocompress option % requires cite.sty v4.0 or later (November 2003) - % \usepackage[nocompress]{cite} + \usepackage[nocompress]{cite} \else % normal IEEE - % \usepackage{cite} + \usepackage{cite} \fi % cite.sty was written by Donald Arseneau % V1.6 and later of IEEEtran pre-defines the format of the cite.sty package @@ -125,8 +111,7 @@ % noadjust option (cite.sty V3.8 and later) if you want to turn this off % such as if a citation ever needs to be enclosed in parenthesis. % cite.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. Be sure and use -% version 4.0 (2003-05-27) and later if using hyperref.sty. cite.sty does -% not currently provide for hyperlinked citations. +% version 5.0 (2009-03-20) and later if using hyperref.sty. % The latest version can be obtained at: % http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/cite/ % The documentation is contained in the cite.sty file itself. @@ -257,7 +242,7 @@ % *** SUBFIGURE PACKAGES *** %\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc -% \usepackage[caption=false,font=normalsize,labelfont=sf,textfont=sf]{subfig} +% \usepackage[caption=false,font=footnotesize,labelfont=sf,textfont=sf]{subfig} %\else % \usepackage[caption=false,font=footnotesize]{subfig} %\fi @@ -270,10 +255,10 @@ % and invoke subfig.sty's "caption=false" package option (available since % subfig.sty version 1.3, 2005/06/28) as this is will preserve IEEEtran.cls % handling of captions. -% Note that the Computer Society format requires a larger sans serif font -% than the serif footnote size font used in traditional IEEE formatting -% and thus the need to invoke different subfig.sty package options depending -% on whether compsoc mode has been enabled. +% Note that the Computer Society format requires a sans serif font rather +% than the serif font used in traditional IEEE formatting and thus the need +% to invoke different subfig.sty package options depending on whether +% compsoc mode has been enabled. % % The latest version and documentation of subfig.sty can be obtained at: % http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/subfig/ @@ -391,7 +376,10 @@ \begin{document} % % paper title -% can use linebreaks \\ within to get better formatting as desired +% Titles are generally capitalized except for words such as a, an, and, as, +% at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to and up, which are usually +% not capitalized unless they are the first or last word of the title. +% Linebreaks \\ can be used within to get better formatting as desired. % Do not put math or special symbols in the title. \title{Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls\\ for Computer Society Journals} % @@ -427,7 +415,7 @@ GA, 30332.\protect\\ % \\ is fragile and will error, could use \hfil\break instead. E-mail: see http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html \IEEEcompsocthanksitem J. Doe and J. Doe are with Anonymous University.}% <-this % stops an unwanted space -\thanks{Manuscript received April 19, 2005; revised December 27, 2012.}} +\thanks{Manuscript received April 19, 2005; revised September 17, 2014.}} % note the % following the last \IEEEmembership and also \thanks - % these prevent an unwanted space from occurring between the last author name @@ -450,7 +438,7 @@ E-mail: see http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html % The paper headers -\markboth{Journal of \LaTeX\ Class Files,~Vol.~11, No.~4, December~2012}% +\markboth{Journal of \LaTeX\ Class Files,~Vol.~13, No.~9, September~2014}% {Shell \MakeLowercase{\textit{et al.}}: Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls for Computer Society Journals} % The only time the second header will appear is for the odd numbered pages % after the title page when using the twoside option. @@ -468,9 +456,9 @@ E-mail: see http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html % journals, the available text space is not reduced by their presence. % If you want to put a publisher's ID mark on the page you can do it like % this: -%\IEEEpubid{0000--0000/00\$00.00~\copyright~2012 IEEE} +%\IEEEpubid{0000--0000/00\$00.00~\copyright~2014 IEEE} % or like this to get the Computer Society new two part style. -%\IEEEpubid{\makebox[\columnwidth]{\hfill 0000--0000/00/\$00.00~\copyright~2012 IEEE}% +%\IEEEpubid{\makebox[\columnwidth]{\hfill 0000--0000/00/\$00.00~\copyright~2014 IEEE}% %\hspace{\columnsep}\makebox[\columnwidth]{Published by the IEEE Computer Society\hfill}} % Remember, if you use this you must call \IEEEpubidadjcol in the second % column for its text to clear the IEEEpubid mark (Computer Society jorunal @@ -528,25 +516,15 @@ Computer Society, IEEEtran, journal, \LaTeX, paper, template. -\section{Introduction} -% Computer Society journal papers do something a tad strange with the very -% first section heading (almost always called "Introduction"). They place it -% ABOVE the main text! IEEEtran.cls currently does not do this for you. -% However, You can achieve this effect by making LaTeX jump through some -% hoops via something like: -% -%\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc -% \noindent\raisebox{2\baselineskip}[0pt][0pt]% -% {\parbox{\columnwidth}{\section{Introduction}\label{sec:introduction}% -% \global\everypar=\everypar}}% -% \vspace{-1\baselineskip}\vspace{-\parskip}\par -%\else -% \section{Introduction}\label{sec:introduction}\par -%\fi -% -% Admittedly, this is a hack and may well be fragile, but seems to do the -% trick for me. Note the need to keep any \label that may be used right -% after \section in the above as the hack puts \section within a raised box. +\IEEEraisesectionheading{\section{Introduction}\label{sec:introduction}} +% Computer Society journal (but not conference!) papers do something unusual +% with the very first section heading (almost always called "Introduction"). +% They place it ABOVE the main text! IEEEtran.cls does not automatically do +% this for you, but you can achieve this effect with the provided +% \IEEEraisesectionheading{} command. Note the need to keep any \label that +% is to refer to the section immediately after \section in the above as +% \IEEEraisesectionheading puts \section within a raised box. + @@ -567,14 +545,14 @@ Computer Society, IEEEtran, journal, \LaTeX, paper, template. % and "HIS" in caps to complete the first word. \IEEEPARstart{T}{his} demo file is intended to serve as a ``starter file'' for IEEE Computer Society journal papers produced under \LaTeX\ using -IEEEtran.cls version 1.8 and later. +IEEEtran.cls version 1.8a and later. % You must have at least 2 lines in the paragraph with the drop letter % (should never be an issue) I wish you the best of success. \hfill mds -\hfill December 27, 2012 +\hfill September 17, 2014 \subsection{Subsection Heading Here} Subsection text here. @@ -605,7 +583,7 @@ Subsubsection text here. % where an .eps filename suffix will be assumed under latex, % and a .pdf suffix will be assumed for pdflatex; or what has been declared % via \DeclareGraphicsExtensions. -%\caption{Simulation Results.} +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.} %\label{fig_sim} %\end{figure} @@ -629,18 +607,26 @@ Subsubsection text here. %\hfil %\subfloat[Case II]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}% %\label{fig_second_case}} -%\caption{Simulation results.} +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.} %\label{fig_sim} %\end{figure*} % % Note that often IEEE papers with subfigures do not employ subfigure % captions (using the optional argument to \subfloat[]), but instead will % reference/describe all of them (a), (b), etc., within the main caption. - - -% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the -% \caption command should come BEFORE the table. Table text will default to -% \footnotesize as IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables. +% Be aware that for subfig.sty to generate the (a), (b), etc., subfigure +% labels, the optional argument to \subfloat must be present. If a +% subcaption is not desired, just leave its contents blank, +% e.g., \subfloat[]. + + +% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the +% \caption command should come BEFORE the table and, given that table +% captions serve much like titles, are usually capitalized except for words +% such as a, an, and, as, at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to +% and up, which are usually not capitalized unless they are the first or +% last word of the caption. Table text will default to \footnotesize as +% IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables. % The \label must come after \caption as always. % %\begin{table}[!t] @@ -663,15 +649,16 @@ Subsubsection text here. %\end{table} -% Note that IEEE does not put floats in the very first column - or typically -% anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also, in-text middle ("here") -% positioning is not used. Most IEEE journals use top floats exclusively. -% However, Computer Society journals sometimes do use bottom floats - bear -% this in mind when choosing appropriate optional arguments for the -% figure/table environments. -% Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals, places footnotes above bottom -% floats. This can be corrected via the \fnbelowfloat command of the -% stfloats package. +% Note that the IEEE does not put floats in the very first column +% - or typically anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also, +% in-text middle ("here") positioning is typically not used, but it +% is allowed and encouraged for Computer Society conferences (but +% not Computer Society journals). Most IEEE journals/conferences use +% top floats exclusively. +% Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals/conferences, places +% footnotes above bottom floats. This can be corrected via the +% \fnbelowfloat command of the stfloats package. + @@ -707,7 +694,7 @@ Appendix one text goes here. Appendix two text goes here. -% use section* for acknowledgement +% use section* for acknowledgment \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc % The Computer Society usually uses the plural form \section*{Acknowledgments} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl_transmag.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl_transmag.tex index 7782e5cd54f..f4fd6db7a27 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl_transmag.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl_transmag.tex @@ -1,13 +1,13 @@ %% bare_jrnl_transmag.tex -%% V1.4 -%% 2012/12/27 +%% V1.4a +%% 2014/09/17 %% by Michael Shell %% see http://www.michaelshell.org/ %% for current contact information. %% %% This is a skeleton file demonstrating the use of IEEEtran.cls -%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8 or later) with an IEEE +%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8a or later) with an IEEE %% Transactions on Magnetics journal paper. %% %% Support sites: @@ -16,16 +16,6 @@ %% and %% http://www.ieee.org/ - - -% *** Authors should verify (and, if needed, correct) their LaTeX system *** -% *** with the testflow diagnostic prior to trusting their LaTeX platform *** -% *** with production work. IEEE's font choices can trigger bugs that do *** -% *** not appear when using other class files. *** -% The testflow support page is at: -% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/testflow/ - - %%************************************************************************* %% Legal Notice: %% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or @@ -50,21 +40,20 @@ %% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. ** %% %% File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex, -%% bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex, -%% bare_jrnl_transmag.tex +%% bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_conf_compsoc.tex, +%% bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex, bare_jrnl_transmag.tex %%************************************************************************* -% Note that the a4paper option is mainly intended so that authors in -% countries using A4 can easily print to A4 and see how their papers will -% look in print - the typesetting of the document will not typically be -% affected with changes in paper size (but the bottom and side margins will). -% Use the testflow package mentioned above to verify correct handling of -% both paper sizes by the user's LaTeX system. -% -% Also note that the "draftcls" or "draftclsnofoot", not "draft", option -% should be used if it is desired that the figures are to be displayed in -% draft mode. -% + +% *** Authors should verify (and, if needed, correct) their LaTeX system *** +% *** with the testflow diagnostic prior to trusting their LaTeX platform *** +% *** with production work. IEEE's font choices and paper sizes can *** +% *** trigger bugs that do not appear when using other class files. *** *** +% The testflow support page is at: +% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/testflow/ + + + \documentclass[journal,transmag]{IEEEtran} % % If IEEEtran.cls has not been installed into the LaTeX system files, @@ -115,8 +104,7 @@ % noadjust option (cite.sty V3.8 and later) if you want to turn this off % such as if a citation ever needs to be enclosed in parenthesis. % cite.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. Be sure and use -% version 4.0 (2003-05-27) and later if using hyperref.sty. cite.sty does -% not currently provide for hyperlinked citations. +% version 5.0 (2009-03-20) and later if using hyperref.sty. % The latest version can be obtained at: % http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/cite/ % The documentation is contained in the cite.sty file itself. @@ -369,7 +357,10 @@ \begin{document} % % paper title -% can use linebreaks \\ within to get better formatting as desired +% Titles are generally capitalized except for words such as a, an, and, as, +% at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to and up, which are usually +% not capitalized unless they are the first or last word of the title. +% Linebreaks \\ can be used within to get better formatting as desired. % Do not put math or special symbols in the title. \title{Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls for \textsc{Transactions on Magnetics}} @@ -388,13 +379,13 @@ Georgia Institute of Technology, Atlanta, GA 30332 USA} \IEEEauthorblockA{\IEEEauthorrefmark{2}Twentieth Century Fox, Springfield, USA} \IEEEauthorblockA{\IEEEauthorrefmark{3}Starfleet Academy, San Francisco, CA 96678 USA} \IEEEauthorblockA{\IEEEauthorrefmark{4}Tyrell Inc., 123 Replicant Street, Los Angeles, CA 90210 USA}% <-this % stops an unwanted space -\thanks{Manuscript received December 1, 2012; revised December 27, 2012. +\thanks{Manuscript received December 1, 2012; revised September 17, 2014. Corresponding author: M. Shell (email: http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html).}} % The paper headers -\markboth{Journal of \LaTeX\ Class Files,~Vol.~11, No.~4, December~2012}% +\markboth{Journal of \LaTeX\ Class Files,~Vol.~13, No.~9, September~2014}% {Shell \MakeLowercase{\textit{et al.}}: Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls for Journals} % The only time the second header will appear is for the odd numbered pages % after the title page when using the twoside option. @@ -409,7 +400,7 @@ Corresponding author: M. Shell (email: http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html) % If you want to put a publisher's ID mark on the page you can do it like % this: -%\IEEEpubid{0000--0000/00\$00.00~\copyright~2012 IEEE} +%\IEEEpubid{0000--0000/00\$00.00~\copyright~2014 IEEE} % Remember, if you use this you must call \IEEEpubidadjcol in the second % column for its text to clear the IEEEpubid mark. @@ -487,15 +478,15 @@ IEEEtran, journal, \LaTeX, magnetics, paper, template. % Here we have the typical use of a "T" for an initial drop letter % and "HIS" in caps to complete the first word. \IEEEPARstart{T}{his} demo file is intended to serve as a ``starter file'' -for IEEE journal papers produced under \LaTeX\ using -IEEEtran.cls version 1.8 and later. +for IEEE \textsc{Transactions on Magnetics} journal papers produced under \LaTeX\ using +IEEEtran.cls version 1.8a and later. % You must have at least 2 lines in the paragraph with the drop letter % (should never be an issue) I wish you the best of success. \hfill mds -\hfill December 27, 2012 +\hfill September 17, 2014 \subsection{Subsection Heading Here} Subsection text here. @@ -526,7 +517,7 @@ Subsubsection text here. % where an .eps filename suffix will be assumed under latex, % and a .pdf suffix will be assumed for pdflatex; or what has been declared % via \DeclareGraphicsExtensions. -%\caption{Simulation Results.} +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.} %\label{fig_sim} %\end{figure} @@ -549,18 +540,26 @@ Subsubsection text here. %\hfil %\subfloat[Case II]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}% %\label{fig_second_case}} -%\caption{Simulation results.} +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.} %\label{fig_sim} %\end{figure*} % % Note that often IEEE papers with subfigures do not employ subfigure % captions (using the optional argument to \subfloat[]), but instead will % reference/describe all of them (a), (b), etc., within the main caption. - - -% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the -% \caption command should come BEFORE the table. Table text will default to -% \footnotesize as IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables. +% Be aware that for subfig.sty to generate the (a), (b), etc., subfigure +% labels, the optional argument to \subfloat must be present. If a +% subcaption is not desired, just leave its contents blank, +% e.g., \subfloat[]. + + +% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the +% \caption command should come BEFORE the table and, given that table +% captions serve much like titles, are usually capitalized except for words +% such as a, an, and, as, at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to +% and up, which are usually not capitalized unless they are the first or +% last word of the caption. Table text will default to \footnotesize as +% IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables. % The \label must come after \caption as always. % %\begin{table}[!t] @@ -583,12 +582,16 @@ Subsubsection text here. %\end{table} -% Note that IEEE does not put floats in the very first column - or typically -% anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also, in-text middle ("here") -% positioning is not used. Most IEEE journals use top floats exclusively. -% Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals, places footnotes above bottom -% floats. This can be corrected via the \fnbelowfloat command of the -% stfloats package. +% Note that the IEEE does not put floats in the very first column +% - or typically anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also, +% in-text middle ("here") positioning is typically not used, but it +% is allowed and encouraged for Computer Society conferences (but +% not Computer Society journals). Most IEEE journals/conferences use +% top floats exclusively. +% Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals/conferences, places +% footnotes above bottom floats. This can be corrected via the +% \fnbelowfloat command of the stfloats package. + @@ -624,7 +627,7 @@ Appendix one text goes here. Appendix two text goes here. -% use section* for acknowledgement +% use section* for acknowledgment \section*{Acknowledgment} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/changelog.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/changelog.txt index d582bec05af..08e2067a31d 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/changelog.txt +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/changelog.txt @@ -1,12 +1,38 @@ Changelog history of the IEEEtran LaTeX class. - 2012/12/27 + 2014/09/17 by Michael Shell (MDS) http://www.michaelshell.org/ + 9/2014 V1.8a (MDS) changes: + 1) Extensive rework of the compsoc mode to comply with the latest standards + of the IEEE Computer Society. + + 2) Internal code improvements for page setup and command argument + processing. + + 3) Fixed abstract, index terms and diamond line for compsoc technotes. + Thanks to Dimitris Schinianakis for reporting this problem. + + 4) New cspaper option to support the special trim paper size + (7.875in x 10.75in) used in actual Computer Society journals. For + compsoc journal mode, typesetting will not be altered by the use of this + option. + + 5) New \IEEEraisesectionheading{} command to provide for the special raised + first section heading of Computer Society journal papers. + + 6) Increased \clubpenalty, \widowpenalty, \displaywidowpenalty to + discourage paragraph breaks at the first and last lines. + Thanks to Dirk Beyer for suggesting this change. + + 7) Added lines per column console message. + + +******* 12/2012 V1.8 (MDS) changes:: 1) New transmag class option to support the IEEE Transactions on Magnetics diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/tools/changelog.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/tools/changelog.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3fb00ea0e96 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/tools/changelog.txt @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + Changelog history of the IEEEtrantools.sty LaTeX package. + 2014/09/17 + by Michael Shell (MDS) + http://www.michaelshell.org/ + + + +2014/09/17 V1.4 (V1.8a of IEEEtran.cls) changes: + + 1) Internal code improvements for command argument processing and + support for future features. + + +******* +12/2012 V1.3 (V1.8 of IEEEtran.cls) changes: + + 1) No longer redefines the standard LaTeX itemize, enumerate and + description (IED) lists by default. (e.g., the older package option + "retainorgcmds" is now the default behavior.) A new package option, + "redeflists", can be invoked to redefine the standard IED list + environments to their IEEE versions. IEEEitemize, IEEEenumerate and + IEEEdescription remain available in any case. The redeflists option + may not be compatible with other packages that alter the standard + IED list environments. + + 2) Added new *-forms of \IEEEyesnumber*, \IEEEnonumber*, \IEEEyessubnumber*, + and \IEEEnosubnumber* (the non-star form of the latter is also new) which + persist across IEEEeqnarray lines until countermanded. To provide for + continued subequations across instances of IEEEeqnarrays as well as for + subequations that follow a main equation (e.g., 14, 14a, 14b ...) + \IEEEyessubnumber no longer automatically increments the equation number + on it's first invocation of a subequation group. Invoke both + \IEEEyesnumber\IEEEyessubnumber together to start a new + equation/subequation group. + + 3) Hyperref links now work with IEEEeqnarray equations. + Thanks to Stefan M. Moser for reporting this problem. + + 4) Now provides the IEEEproof environment, as well as the + \IEEEQEDhere, \IEEEQEDhereeqn and \IEEEQEDoff commands. + Also, \IEEEproofindentspace allows users to change the + IEEEproof indentation via \renewcommand. + Thanks to Mark D. Butala, Hennadiy Leontyev and Stefan M. Moser + for suggesting this. Special thanks to Stefan M. Moser for beta + testing and additional suggestions which improved IEEEproof. + + 5) Revised \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{} to allow inner alignments without + requiring extra containing braces to prevent an incomplete \ifx error. + Thanks to Stefan M. Moser and Auke van der Valk for reporting this + problem. + + 6) Added \IEEEauthorrefmark. + + 7) Removed support for legacy IED list commands. + IEEEtrantools no longer defines or references \labelindent so as to + avoid namespace problems with list packages that define it. + Thanks to Sven Köhler for reporting the problem with enumitem.sty. + + +******* + 1/2007 V1.2 (V1.7 of IEEEtran.cls) changes: + + 1) Several commands and environments have depreciated in favor of + replacements with IEEE prefixes to better avoid potential future name + clashes with other packages. Legacy code retained to allow + use of the obsolete forms, but with an warning message to the + console during compilation: + \IEEEPARstart + For IED lists: + \IEEEiedlabeljustifyc, \IEEEiedlabeljustifyl, \IEEEiedlabeljustifyr, + \IEEEnocalcleftmargin, \IEEElabelindent, \IEEEsetlabelwidth, + \IEEEusemathlabelsep + + 2) These commands/lengths now require the IEEE prefix and do not have + legacy support: \IEEEnormaljot. + For IED lists: \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin, \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor, + \IEEEiedlistdecl, \IEEElabelindentfactor + + 3) \normalsizebaselineskip no longer provided. + + 4) New \IEEEPARstart controls: + \IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT, \IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE, \IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE, + \IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE, \IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE, + \IEEEPARstartHOFFSET, \IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT + and the (output) length \IEEEPARstartletwidth. + + 5) Provide for an optional argument to \bstctlcite to provide a way to + specify a different aux file. + + +******* + 11/2002 V1.1 (V1.6b of IEEEtran.cls) changes: + + 1) In addition to the IEEE IED lists, the original LaTeX IED style list + environments are now preserved as LaTeXitemize, LaTeXenumerate, and + LaTeXdescription. Also, users can now redefine \makelabel within + IEEE IED list controls. There may be some use for these in specialized + applications. Thanks to Eli Barzilay for suggesting this feature. + + +******* + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtran.cls b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtran.cls index 5e2d1839b4c..67958d9b331 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtran.cls +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtran.cls @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ %% -%% IEEEtran.cls 2012/12/27 version V1.8 +%% IEEEtran.cls 2014/09/17 version V1.8a %% %% This is the IEEEtran LaTeX class for authors of the Institute of %% Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Transactions journals and @@ -18,19 +18,19 @@ %% Contributors: %% Gerry Murray (1993), Silvano Balemi (1993), %% Jon Dixon (1996), Peter N"uchter (1996), -%% Juergen von Hagen (2000), and Michael Shell (2001-2012) +%% Juergen von Hagen (2000), and Michael Shell (2001-2014) %% %% %% Copyright (c) 1993-2000 by Gerry Murray, Silvano Balemi, %% Jon Dixon, Peter N"uchter, %% Juergen von Hagen %% and -%% Copyright (c) 2001-2012 by Michael Shell +%% Copyright (c) 2001-2014 by Michael Shell %% -%% Current maintainer (V1.3 to V1.8): Michael Shell -%% See: -%% http://www.michaelshell.org/ -%% for current contact information. +%% Current maintainer (V1.3 to V1.8a): Michael Shell +%% See: +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/ +%% for current contact information. %% %% Special thanks to Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau %% for allowing the inclusion of the \@ifmtarg command @@ -60,7 +60,8 @@ %% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. ** %% %% File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex, -%% bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex +%% bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_conf_compsoc.tex, +%% bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex %% %% Major changes to the user interface should be indicated by an %% increase in the version numbers. If a version is a beta, it will @@ -109,22 +110,33 @@ % also want to select onecolumn. % The default is final. % -% letterpaper, a4paper -% determines paper size: 8.5in X 11in or 210mm X 297mm. CHANGING THE PAPER -% SIZE WILL NOT ALTER THE TYPESETTING OF THE DOCUMENT - ONLY THE MARGINS -% WILL BE AFFECTED. In particular, documents using the a4paper option will +% letterpaper, a4paper, cspaper +% determines paper size: 8.5in X 11in, 210mm X 297mm or 7.875in X 10.75in. +% Changing the paper size in the standard journal and conference modes +% will not alter the typesetting of the document - only the margins will +% be affected. In particular, documents using the a4paper option will % have reduced side margins (A4 is narrower than US letter) and a longer % bottom margin (A4 is longer than US letter). For both cases, the top -% margins will be the same and the text will be horizontally centered. -% For final submission to IEEE, authors should use US letter (8.5 X 11in) -% paper. Note that authors should ensure that all post-processing -% (ps, pdf, etc.) uses the same paper specificiation as the .tex document. -% Problems here are by far the number one reason for incorrect margins. -% IEEEtran will automatically set the default paper size under pdflatex -% (without requiring a change to pdftex.cfg), so this issue is more -% important to dvips users. Fix config.ps, config.pdf, or ~/.dvipsrc for -% dvips, or use the dvips -t papersize option instead as needed. See the -% testflow documentation +% margins will be the same and the text will be horizontally centered. +% For the compsoc conference and draft modes, it is the margins that will +% remain constant, and thus the text area size will vary, with changes in +% the paper size. +% The cspaper option is the special ``trim'' paper size (7.875in x 10.75in) +% used in the actual publication of Computer Society journals. Under +% compsoc journal mode, this option does not alter the typesetting of the +% document. Authors should invoke the cspaper option only if requested to +% do so by the editors of the specific journal they are submitting to. +% For final submission to the IEEE, authors should generally use US letter +% (8.5 X 11in) paper unless otherwise instructed. Note that authors should +% ensure that all post-processing (ps, pdf, etc.) uses the same paper +% specificiation as the .tex document. Problems here are by far the number +% one reason for incorrect margins. IEEEtran will automatically set the +% default paper size under pdflatex (without requiring any change to +% pdftex.cfg), so this issue is more important to dvips users. Fix +% config.ps, config.pdf, or ~/.dvipsrc for dvips, or use the +% dvips -t papersize option instead as needed. For the cspaper option, +% the corresponding dvips paper name is "ieeecs". +% See the testflow documentation % http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/testflow % for more details on dvips paper size configuration. % The default is letterpaper. @@ -190,7 +202,7 @@ -\ProvidesClass{IEEEtran}[2012/12/27 V1.8 by Michael Shell] +\ProvidesClass{IEEEtran}[2014/09/17 V1.8a by Michael Shell] \typeout{-- See the "IEEEtran_HOWTO" manual for usage information.} \typeout{-- http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/} \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} @@ -205,6 +217,11 @@ \def\IEEEtransversionmajor{1} \def\IEEEtransversionminor{8} + +% hook to allow easy changeover to IEEEtran.cls/tools.sty error reporting +\def\@IEEEclspkgerror{\ClassError{IEEEtran}} + + % These do nothing, but provide them like in article.cls \newif\if@restonecol \newif\if@titlepage @@ -247,16 +264,19 @@ % V1.6b internal flag to show if using a4paper \newif\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse - +% V1.6b internal flag to show if using cspaper +\newif\if@IEEEusingcspaper \@IEEEusingcspaperfalse % IEEEtran class scratch pad registers % dimen \newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA \newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB +\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC % count \newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountA \newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountB +\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountC % token list \newtoks\@IEEEtrantmptoksA @@ -272,21 +292,32 @@ -\DeclareOption{letterpaper}{\setlength{\paperheight}{11in}% - \setlength{\paperwidth}{8.5in}% +\DeclareOption{letterpaper}{\setlength{\paperwidth}{8.5in}% + \setlength{\paperheight}{11in}% \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse + \@IEEEusingcspaperfalse \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{letter}% \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{8.5in}% \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{11in}} -\DeclareOption{a4paper}{\setlength{\paperheight}{297mm}% - \setlength{\paperwidth}{210mm}% +\DeclareOption{a4paper}{\setlength{\paperwidth}{210mm}% + \setlength{\paperheight}{297mm}% \@IEEEusingAfourpapertrue + \@IEEEusingcspaperfalse \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{a4}% \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{210mm}% \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{297mm}} +% special paper option for compsoc journals +\DeclareOption{cspaper}{\setlength{\paperwidth}{7.875in}% + \setlength{\paperheight}{10.75in}% + \@IEEEusingcspapertrue + \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse + \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{ieeecs}% + \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{7.875in}% + \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{10.75in}} + \DeclareOption{oneside}{\@twosidefalse\@mparswitchfalse \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue\CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse} \DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue\@mparswitchtrue @@ -342,6 +373,65 @@ +%% -- Command Argument Scanning Support Functions -- +% +% usage: \@IEEEextracttoken*{} +% \@IEEEextracttoken fully expands its argument (which it then stores in +% \@IEEEextracttokenarg) via \edef and then the meaning of the first +% nonbrace (but including the empty group) token found is assigned via \let +% to \@IEEEextractedtoken as well as stored in the macro +% \@IEEEextractedtokenmacro. Tokens that would otherwise be discarded during +% the acquisition of the first are stored in \@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded, +% however their original relative brace nesting depths are not guaranteed to +% be preserved. +% If the argument is empty, or if a first nonbrace token does not exist (or +% is an empty group), \@IEEEextractedtoken will be \relax and +% \@IEEEextractedtokenmacro and \@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded will be empty. +% +% For example: +% \@IEEEextracttoken{{{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g}} +% results in: +% +% \@IEEEextracttokenarg ==> a macro containing {{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g} +% \@IEEEextractedtoken ==> the letter a +% \@IEEEextractedtokenmacro ==> a macro containing a +% \@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded ==> a macro containing bcd{ef}g +% +% the *-star form, \@IEEEextracttoken*, does not expand its argument +% contents during processing. +\def\@IEEEextracttoken{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEextracttokendef=\def\@@IEEEextracttoken}{\let\@IEEEextracttokendef=\edef\@@IEEEextracttoken}} + +\def\@@IEEEextracttoken#1{\@IEEEextracttokendef\@IEEEextracttokenarg{#1}\relax +\def\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded{}\relax % initialize to empty +% if the macro is unchanged after being acquired as a single undelimited argument +% with anything after it being stripped off as a delimited argument +% we know we have one token without any enclosing braces. loop until this is true. +\let\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup\@IEEEextracttokenarg +\loop + % trap case of an empty argument as this would cause a problem with + % \@@@IEEEextracttoken's first (nondelimited) argument acquisition + \ifx\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup\@empty + \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{}\relax + \else + \expandafter\@@@IEEEextracttoken\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER\relax + \fi + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup + \else + \let\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup=\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro +\repeat +% we can safely do a \let= here because there should be at most one token +% the relax is needed to handle the case of no token found +\expandafter\let\expandafter\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\relax} + +\def\@@@IEEEextracttoken#1#2\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER{\def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{#1}\relax +\def\@@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded{#2}\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter +\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter +{\expandafter\@@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded}} +%% +%% -- End of Command Argument Scanning Support Functions -- + + + % Computer Society conditional execution command \long\def\@IEEEcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\relax#1\relax\fi\relax} % inverse @@ -465,15 +555,31 @@ \newdimen\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip \@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\baselineskip + + +%% ******* WARNING! ******* +%% +%% Authors should not alter font sizes, baselineskip ("leading"), +%% margins or other spacing values in an attempt to squeeze more +%% material on each page. +%% +%% The IEEE's own typesetting software will restore the correct +%% values when re-typesetting/proofing the submitted document, +%% possibly resulting in unexpected article over length charges. +%% +%% ******* WARNING! ******* + + +% 9pt option defaults \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine \typeout{-- This is a 9 point document.} -\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9}{11.0476pt}}% -\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.0476pt}% +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9}{11.0476pt}} +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.0476pt} \normalsize -\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus3pt minus1pt% -\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% -\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus3pt% -\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus3pt minus1pt +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 3pt minus 1pt +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 3pt +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 3pt minus 1pt \def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{8.5}{10pt}} \def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}} \def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}} @@ -486,18 +592,17 @@ \def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{17}{20pt}} \def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{20}{24pt}} \fi - - -% Check if we have selected 10 points +% +% 10pt option defaults \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten \typeout{-- This is a 10 point document.} -\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10}{12.00pt}}% -\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{12pt}% +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10}{12.00pt}} +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{12pt} \normalsize -\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus4pt minus2pt% -\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% -\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus4pt% -\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus4pt minus2pt +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 4pt minus 2pt +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 4pt +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 4pt minus 2pt \def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{9}{10pt}} \def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}} \def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}} @@ -510,18 +615,17 @@ \def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}} \def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}} \fi - - -% Check if we have selected 11 points +% +% 11pt option defaults \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven \typeout{-- This is an 11 point document.} -\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11}{13.3846pt}}% -\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.3846pt}% +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11}{13.3846pt}} +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.3846pt} \normalsize -\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus5pt minus3pt% -\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% -\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus5pt% -\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus5pt minus3pt +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 5pt minus 3pt +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 5pt +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 5pt minus 3pt \def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}} \def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}} \def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}} @@ -534,18 +638,17 @@ \def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}} \def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}} \fi - - -% Check if we have selected 12 points +% +% 12pt option defaults \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve \typeout{-- This is a 12 point document.} -\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12}{13.92pt}}% -\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.92pt}% +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12}{13.92pt}} +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.92pt} \normalsize -\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus6pt minus4pt% -\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% -\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus6pt% -\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus6pt minus4pt +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 6pt minus 4pt +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 6pt +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 6pt minus 4pt \def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}} \def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}} \def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}} @@ -560,11 +663,206 @@ \fi + +% V1.8a compsoc font sizes +% compsoc font sizes use bp "Postscript" point units (1/72in) +% rather than the traditional pt (1/72.27) +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +% -- compsoc defaults -- +% ** will override some of these values later ** +% 9pt +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9bp}{11bp}} +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11bp} +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip +\abovedisplayshortskip 0bp plus 3bp +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{8.5bp}{10bp}} +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8bp}{9bp}} +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7bp}{8bp}} +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5bp}{6bp}} +% sublargesize is the same as large - 10bp +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{10bp}{12bp}} +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{10bp}{12bp}} +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{12bp}{14bp}} +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{14bp}{17bp}} +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{17bp}{20bp}} +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{20bp}{24bp}} +\fi +% +% 10pt +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10bp}{12bp}} +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{12bp} +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 4bp +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{9bp}{10bp}} +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8bp}{9bp}} +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7bp}{8bp}} +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5bp}{6bp}} +% sublargesize is a tad smaller than large - 11bp +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{11bp}{13.5bp}} +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12bp}{14bp}} +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14bp}{17bp}} +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17bp}{20bp}} +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20bp}{24bp}} +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24bp}{28bp}} +\fi +% +% 11pt +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11bp}{13.5bp}} +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.5bp} +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 5bp +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10bp}{12bp}} +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9bp}{10.5bp}} +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8bp}{9bp}} +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6bp}{7bp}} +% sublargesize is the same as large - 12bp +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{12bp}{14bp}} +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12bp}{14bp}} +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14bp}{17bp}} +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17bp}{20bp}} +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20bp}{24bp}} +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24bp}{28bp}} +\fi +% +% 12pt +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12bp}{14bp}}% +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{14bp}% +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 6bp +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10bp}{12bp}} +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9bp}{10.5bp}} +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8bp}{9bp}} +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6bp}{7bp}} +% sublargesize is the same as large - 14bp +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{14bp}{17bp}} +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{14bp}{17bp}} +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{17bp}{20bp}} +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{20bp}{24bp}} +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{22bp}{26bp}} +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24bp}{28bp}} +\fi +% +% -- override defaults: compsoc journals use special normalsizes -- +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference +% +% compsoc conferences +% 9pt +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9bp}{10.8bp}} +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{10.8bp} +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip +\abovedisplayshortskip 0bp plus 3bp +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp +\fi +% 10pt +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10bp}{11.2bp}} +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.2bp} +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 4bp +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp +\fi +% 11pt +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11bp}{13.2bp}} +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.2bp} +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 5bp +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp +\fi +% 12pt +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12bp}{14.4bp}} +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{14.4bp} +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 6bp +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp +\fi +% +% compsoc nonconferences +\else +% 9pt +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9bp}{10.8bp}} +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{10.8bp} +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip +\abovedisplayshortskip 0bp plus 3bp +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp +\fi +% 10pt +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten +% the official spec is 9.5bp with 11.4bp leading for 10pt, +% but measurements of proofs suggest upto 11.723bp leading +% here we'll use 11.54bp which gives 61 lines per column +% with the standard compsoc margins +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9.5bp}{11.54bp}} +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.54bp} +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 4bp +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp +\fi +% 11pt +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11bp}{13.2bp}} +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.2bp} +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 5bp +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp +\fi +% 12pt +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12bp}{14.4bp}} +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{14.4bp} +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 6bp +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp +\fi +\fi\fi + + + + % V1.6 The Computer Modern Fonts will issue a substitution warning for -% 24pt titles (24.88pt is used instead) increase the substitution -% tolerance to turn off this warning -\def\fontsubfuzz{.9pt} -% However, the default (and correct) Times font will scale exactly as needed. +% 24pt titles (24.88pt is used instead, but the default and correct +% Times font will scale exactly as needed) increase the substitution +% tolerance to turn off this warning. +% +% V1.8a, the compsoc bp font sizes can also cause bogus font substitution +% warnings with footnote or scriptsize math and the $\bullet$ itemized +% list of \IEEEcompsocitemizethanks. So, increase this to 1.5pt or more. +\def\fontsubfuzz{1.7bp} % warn the user in case they forget to use the 9pt option with @@ -611,7 +909,7 @@ \baselinestretch\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.} \fi -\normalsize % make \baselinestretch take affect +\small\normalsize % make \baselinestretch take affect @@ -669,6 +967,21 @@ \def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB{0.55} +% compsoc nonconference papers use Palatino, +% tweak settings to better match the proofs +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else +% for medium (normal weight) +\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioM{0.28} +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM{0.21} +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM{0.47} +% for bold +\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioB{0.305} +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB{0.21} +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB{0.52} +\fi\fi + + % command to revise the interword spacing for the current font under TeX: % \fontdimen2 = nominal interword space % \fontdimen3 = interword stretch @@ -731,7 +1044,569 @@ -% V1.6 + + +% -- V1.8a page setup commands -- + +% The default sample text for calculating margins +% Note that IEEE publications use \scriptsize for headers and footers. +\def\IEEEdefaultsampletext{\normalfont\normalsize gT} +\def\IEEEdefaultheadersampletext{\normalfont\scriptsize T}% IEEE headers default to uppercase +\def\IEEEdefaultfootersampletext{\normalfont\scriptsize gT} + + + +% usage: \IEEEsettextwidth{inner margin}{outer margin} +% Sets \textwidth to allow the specified inner and outer margins +% for the current \paperwidth. +\def\IEEEsettextwidth#1#2{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\paperwidth +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB#1\relax +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB#2\relax +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB +\textwidth\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA} + + + +% usage: \IEEEsetsidemargin{mode: i, o, c, a}{margin/offset} +% Sets \oddsidemargin and \evensidemargin to yield the specified margin +% of the given mode. +% The available modes are: +% i = inner margin +% o = outer margin +% c = centered, with the given offset +% a = adjust the margins using the given offset +% For the offsets, positive values increase the inner margin. +% \textwidth should be set properly for the given margins before calling this +% function. +\def\IEEEsetsidemargin#1#2{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #2\relax +\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax +% check for mode errors +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak + Defaulting to `i'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space are: i, o, c and a.}\relax + \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=i\relax + \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{i}\relax +\else + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else + \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax + \fi +\fi +% handle each mode +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax + \advance\oddsidemargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +\else +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax + \oddsidemargin\paperwidth + \advance\oddsidemargin by -\textwidth + \divide\oddsidemargin by 2\relax + \advance\oddsidemargin by -1in\relax + \advance\oddsidemargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +\else +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken o\relax + \oddsidemargin\paperwidth + \advance\oddsidemargin by -\textwidth + \advance\oddsidemargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA + \advance\oddsidemargin by -1in\relax +\else + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken i\relax + \else + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak + Defaulting to `i'}% + {Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space are: i, o, c and a.}% + \fi + \oddsidemargin\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA + \advance\oddsidemargin by -1in\relax +\fi\fi\fi +% odd and even side margins both mean "inner" for single sided pages +\evensidemargin\oddsidemargin +% but are mirrors of each other when twosided is in effect +\if@twoside + \evensidemargin\paperwidth + \advance\evensidemargin by -\textwidth + \advance\evensidemargin by -\oddsidemargin + % have to compensate for both the builtin 1in LaTex offset + % and the fact we already subtracted this offset from \oddsidemargin + \advance\evensidemargin -2in\relax +\fi} + + + +% usage: \IEEEsettextheight[sample text]{top text margin}{bottom text margin} +% Sets \textheight based on the specified top margin and bottom margin. +% Takes into consideration \paperheight, \topskip, and (by default) the +% the actual height and depth of the \IEEEdefaultsampletext text. +\def\IEEEsettextheight{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsettextheight}{\@IEEEsettextheight[\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}} +\def\@IEEEsettextheight[#1]#2#3{\textheight\paperheight\relax + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #2\relax + \advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% subtract top margin + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #3\relax + \advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% subtract bottom margin + \advance \textheight by \topskip% add \topskip + % subtract off everything above the top, and below the bottom, baselines + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA} + + + +\newdimen\IEEEquantizedlength +\IEEEquantizedlength 0sp\relax +\newdimen\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff +\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff 0sp\relax +\def\IEEEquantizedlengthint{0} + +% usage: \IEEEquantizelength{mode: d, c, i}{base unit}{length} +% Sets the length \IEEEquantizedlength to be an integer multiple of the given +% (nonzero) base unit such that \IEEEquantizedlength approximates the given +% length. +% \IEEEquantizedlengthdiff is a length equal to the difference between the +% \IEEEquantizedlength and the given length. +% \IEEEquantizedlengthint is a macro containing the integer number of base units +% in \IEEEquantizedlength. +% i.e., \IEEEquantizedlength = \IEEEquantizedlengthint * base unit +% The mode determines how \IEEEquantizedlength is quantized: +% d = always decrease (always round down \IEEEquantizeint) +% c = use the closest match +% i = always increase (always round up \IEEEquantizeint) +% In anycase, if the given length is already quantized, +% \IEEEquantizedlengthdiff will be set to zero. +\def\IEEEquantizelength#1#2#3{\begingroup +% work in isolation so as not to externally disturb the \@IEEEtrantmp +% variables +% load the argument values indirectly via \IEEEquantizedlengthdiff +% in case the user refers to our \@IEEEtrantmpdimenX, \IEEEquantizedlength, +% etc. in the arguments. we also will work with these as counters, +% i.e., in sp units +% A has the base unit +\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff #2\relax\relax\relax\relax +\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff +% B has the input length +\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff #3\relax\relax\relax\relax +\@IEEEtrantmpcountB\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA sp\relax +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountB sp\relax +% \@IEEEtrantmpcountC will have the quantized int +% \IEEEquantizedlength will have the quantized length +% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC will have the quantized diff +% initialize them to zero as this is what will be +% exported if an error occurs +\@IEEEtrantmpcountC 0\relax +\IEEEquantizedlength 0sp\relax +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC 0sp\relax +% extract mode +\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax +% check for mode errors +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEquantizelength\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak + Defaulting to `d'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEquantizelength\space are: d, c and i.}\relax + \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=d\relax + \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{d}\relax +\else + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else + \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEquantizelength\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax + \fi +\fi +% check for base unit is zero error +\ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=0\relax +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Base unit is zero in \string\IEEEquantizelength\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak + \string\IEEEquantizedlength\space and \string\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff\space are set to zero}{Division by zero is not allowed.}\relax +\else% base unit is nonzero + % \@IEEEtrantmpcountC carries the number of integer units + % in the quantized length (integer length \ base) + \@IEEEtrantmpcountC\@IEEEtrantmpcountB\relax + \divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax + % \IEEEquantizedlength has the (rounded down) quantized length + % = base * int + \IEEEquantizedlength\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax + \multiply\IEEEquantizedlength by \@IEEEtrantmpcountC\relax + % \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC has the difference + % = quantized length - length + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\IEEEquantizedlength\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax + % trap special case of length being already quantized + % to avoid a roundup under i option + \ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC=0sp\relax + \else % length not is already quantized + % set dimenA to carry the upper quantized (absolute value) difference: + % quantizedlength + base - length + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \IEEEquantizedlength\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax + % set dimenB to carry the lower quantized (absolute value) difference: + % length - quantizedlength + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\IEEEquantizedlength\relax + % handle each mode + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax + % compare upper and lower amounts, select upper if lower > upper + \ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB>\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax + % use upper + \advance\IEEEquantizedlength by \the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA sp\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by 1\relax + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA + \else% <=. uselower + % no need to do anything for lower, use output values already setup + \fi + \else% not mode c + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken i\relax + % always round up under i mode + \advance\IEEEquantizedlength by \the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA sp\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by 1\relax + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA + \else + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken d\relax + \else + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEquantizelength\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak + Defaulting to `d'}% + {Valid modes for \string\IEEEquantizelength\space are: d, c, and i.}\relax + \fi % if d + % no need to do anything for d, use output values already setup + \fi\fi % if i, c + \fi % if length is already quantized +\fi% if base unit is zero +% globally assign the results to macros we use here to escape the enclosing +% group without needing to call \global on any of the \@IEEEtrantmp variables. +% \@IEEEtrantmpcountC has the quantized int +% \IEEEquantizedlength has the quantized length +% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC has the quantized diff +\xdef\@IEEEquantizedlengthintmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax +\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlength\relax +\xdef\@IEEEquantizedlengthmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax +\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\relax +\xdef\@IEEEquantizedlengthdiffmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax +\endgroup +% locally assign the outputs here from the macros +\expandafter\IEEEquantizedlength\@IEEEquantizedlengthmacro sp\relax +\expandafter\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff\@IEEEquantizedlengthdiffmacro sp\relax +\edef\IEEEquantizedlengthint{\@IEEEquantizedlengthintmacro}\relax} + + + +\newdimen\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff +\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff 0sp\relax + +% usage: \IEEEquantizetextheight[base unit]{mode: d, c, i} +% Sets \textheight to be an integer multiple of the current \baselineskip +% (or the optionally specified base unit) plus the first (\topskip) line. +% \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff is a length equal to the difference between +% the new quantized and original \textheight. +% \IEEEquantizedtextheightlpc is a macro containing the integer number of +% lines per column under the quantized \textheight. i.e., +% \textheight = \IEEEquantizedtextheightlpc * \baselineskip + \topskip +% The mode determines how \textheight is quantized: +% d = always decrease (always round down the number of lines per column) +% c = use the closest match +% i = always increase (always round up the number of lines per column) +% In anycase, if \textheight is already quantized, it will remain unchanged, +% and \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff will be set to zero. +% Depends on: \IEEEquantizelength +\def\IEEEquantizetextheight{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEquantizetextheight}{\@IEEEquantizetextheight[\baselineskip]}} +\def\@IEEEquantizetextheight[#1]#2{\begingroup +% use our \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff as a scratch pad +% we need to subtract off \topskip before quantization +\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff\textheight +\advance\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff by -\topskip\relax +\IEEEquantizelength{#2}{#1}{\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff} +% add back \topskip line +\advance\IEEEquantizedlength by \topskip +\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlengthint\relax +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by 1\relax +% globally assign the results to macros we use here to escape the enclosing +% group without needing to call \global on any of the \@IEEEtrantmp variables. +\xdef\@IEEEquantizedtextheightlpcmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax +\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlength\relax +\xdef\@IEEEquantizedtextheightmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax +\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff\relax +\xdef\@IEEEquantizedtextheightdiffmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax +\endgroup +% locally assign the outputs here from the macros +\textheight\@IEEEquantizedtextheightmacro sp\relax +\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff\@IEEEquantizedtextheightdiffmacro sp\relax +\edef\IEEEquantizedtextheightlpc{\@IEEEquantizedtextheightlpcmacro}} + + + +% usage: \IEEEsettopmargin[sample text]{mode: t, b, c, a, q}{margin/offset} +% Sets \topmargin based on the specified vertical margin. +% Takes into consideration the base 1in offset, \headheight, \headsep, +% \topskip, and (by default) the the actual height (or, for the bottom, depth) +% of the \IEEEdefaultsampletext text. +% The available modes are: +% t = top margin +% b = bottom margin +% c = vertically centered, with the given offset +% a = adjust the vertical margins using the given offset +% q = adjust the margins using \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff and the given offset +% For the offsets, positive values increase the top margin. +% \headheight, \headsep, \topskip and \textheight should be set properly for the +% given margins before calling this function. +\def\IEEEsettopmargin{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsettopmargin}{\@IEEEsettopmargin[\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}} +\def\@IEEEsettopmargin[#1]#2#3{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #3\relax +\@IEEEextracttoken{#2}\relax +% check for mode errors +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak + Defaulting to `t'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space are: t, b, c, a and q.}\relax + \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=t\relax + \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{t}\relax +\else + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else + \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax + \fi +\fi +% handle each mode +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax + \advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +\else +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken q\relax + % we need to adjust by half the \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff value + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff\relax + \divide\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by 2\relax + % a positive \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff means we need to reduce \topmargin + % because \textheight has been lenghtened + \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax + \advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +\else +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax + \topmargin\paperheight + \advance\topmargin by -\textheight + % \textheight includes \topskip, but we should not count topskip whitespace here, backout + \advance \topmargin by \topskip + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax + \divide\topmargin by 2\relax + \advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +\else +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken b\relax + \topmargin\paperheight + \advance\topmargin by -\textheight + % \textheight includes \topskip, but we should not count topskip whitespace here, backout + \advance \topmargin by \topskip + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax + \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +\else + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax + \else + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak + Defaulting to `t'}% + {Valid modes for \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space are: t, b, c, a and q.}\relax + \fi + \topmargin\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax +\fi\fi % if t, b, c +% convert desired top margin into actual \topmargin +% this is not done for the q or a modes because they are only adjustments +\advance \topmargin by -\topskip +\advance \topmargin by -1in +\advance \topmargin by -\headheight +\advance \topmargin by -\headsep +\fi\fi % if q, a +} + + + +% usage: \IEEEsetheadermargin[header sample][text sample]{mode: t, b, c, a}{margin/offset} +% Differentially adjusts \topmargin and \headsep (such that their sum is unchanged) +% based on the specified header margin. +% Takes into consideration the base 1in offset, \headheight, \topskip, and (by default) +% the actual height (or depth) of the \IEEEdefaultheadersampletext and +% \IEEEdefaultsampletext text. +% The available modes are: +% t = top margin (top of the header text to the top of the page) +% b = bottom margin (bottom of the header text to the top of the main text) +% c = vertically centered between the main text and the top of the page, +% with the given offset +% a = adjust the vertical position using the given offset +% For the offsets, positive values move the header downward. +% \headheight, \headsep, \topskip and \topmargin should be set properly before +% calling this function. +\def\IEEEsetheadermargin{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsetheadermargin}{\@IEEEsetheadermargin[\IEEEdefaultheadersampletext]}} +\def\@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1]{\@ifnextchar [{\@@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1]}{\@@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1][\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}} +\def\@@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1][#2]#3#4{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #4\relax +\@IEEEextracttoken{#3}\relax +% check for mode errors +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak + Defaulting to `t'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space are: t, b, c, and a.}\relax + \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=t\relax + \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{t}\relax +\else + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else + \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax + \fi +\fi +% handle each mode +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax + % No need to do anything here and can pass through the adjustment + % value as is. The end adjustment of \topmargin and \headsep will + % do all that is needed +\else +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax + % get the bottom margin + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \topskip + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual header bottom margin + % subtract from it the top header margin + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB -1in\relax % take into consideration the system 1in offset of the top margin + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\topmargin + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\headheight + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the difference between the bottom and top margins + % we need to adjust by half this amount to center the header + \divide\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by 2\relax + % and add to offset + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB +\else +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken b\relax + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \topskip + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual header bottom margin + % get the difference between the actual and the desired + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB +\else + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax + \else + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak + Defaulting to `t'}% + {Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space are: t, b, c and a.}\relax + \fi + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 1in\relax % take into consideration the system 1in offset of the top margin + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \topmargin + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \headheight + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual header top margin + % get the difference between the desired and the actual + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB +\fi\fi % if t, b, c +\fi % if a +% advance \topmargin by the needed amount and reduce \headsep by the same +% so as not to disturb the location of the main text +\advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +\advance\headsep by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +} + + + +% usage: \IEEEsetfootermargin[footer sample][text sample]{mode: t, b, c, a}{margin/offset} +% Adjusts \footskip based on the specified footer margin. +% Takes into consideration the base 1in offset, \paperheight, \headheight, +% \headsep, \textheight and (by default) the actual height (or depth) of the +% \IEEEdefaultfootersampletext and \IEEEdefaultsampletext text. +% The available modes are: +% t = top margin (top of the footer text to the bottom of the main text) +% b = bottom margin (bottom of the footer text to the bottom of page) +% c = vertically centered between the main text and the bottom of the page, +% with the given offset +% a = adjust the vertical position using the given offset +% For the offsets, positive values move the footer downward. +% \headheight, \headsep, \topskip, \topmargin, and \textheight should be set +% properly before calling this function. +\def\IEEEsetfootermargin{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsetfootermargin}{\@IEEEsetfootermargin[\IEEEdefaultfootersampletext]}} +\def\@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1]{\@ifnextchar [{\@@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1]}{\@@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1][\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}} +\def\@@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1][#2]#3#4{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #4\relax +\@IEEEextracttoken{#3}\relax +% check for mode errors +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak + Defaulting to `t'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space are: t, b, c, and a.}\relax + \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=t\relax + \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{t}\relax +\else + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else + \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax + \fi +\fi +% handle each mode +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax + % No need to do anything here and can pass through the adjustment + % value as is. The end adjustment of \footskip will do all that + % is needed +\else +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax + % calculate the bottom margin + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 1in\relax % system 1in offset + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\topmargin\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headheight\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\textheight\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\footskip\relax + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\paperheight + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual footer bottom margin + % now subtract off the footer top margin + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB -\footskip\relax + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the difference between the bottom + % and top footer margins + % our adjustment must be half this value to center the footer + \divide\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by 2\relax + % add to the offset + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB +\else +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken b\relax + % calculate the bottom margin + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 1in\relax % system 1in offset + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\topmargin\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headheight\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\textheight\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\footskip\relax + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\paperheight + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual footer bottom margin + % get the difference between the actual and the desired + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB +\else + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax + \else + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak + Defaulting to `t'}% + {Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space are: t, b, c and a.}\relax + \fi + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\footskip\relax + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual footer top margin + % get the difference between the desired and the actual + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB +\fi\fi % if t, b, c +\fi % if a +% advance \footskip by the needed amount +\advance\footskip by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +} + +% -- End V1.8a page setup commands -- + + + + + +% V1.6 % LaTeX is a little to quick to use hyphenations % So, we increase the penalty for their use and raise % the badness level that triggers an underfull hbox @@ -740,6 +1615,9 @@ % of the box" than that under V1.5 and prior. % TeX default is 50 \hyphenpenalty=750 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +\hyphenpenalty 500 +\fi % If we didn't adjust the interword spacing, 2200 might be better. % The TeX default is 1000 \hbadness=1350 @@ -750,6 +1628,11 @@ \binoppenalty=1000 % default 700 \relpenalty=800 % default 500 +% v1.8a increase these to discourage widows and orphans +\clubpenalty=1000 % default 150 +\widowpenalty=1000 % default 150 +\displaywidowpenalty=1000 % default 50 + % margin note stuff \marginparsep 10pt @@ -772,113 +1655,115 @@ \parskip 0ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.1ex \parindent 1.0em +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc + \parindent 1.5em +\fi -\topmargin -49.0pt \headheight 12pt -\headsep 0.25in - +\headsep 18pt % use the normal font baselineskip % so that \topskip is unaffected by changes in \baselinestretch \topskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip + + % V1.8 \maxdepth defaults to 4pt, but should be font size dependent \maxdepth=0.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip \textheight 58pc % 9.63in, 696pt -% Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page. -% The normal baselineskip for each document point size is used -% to determine these values. -\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=63\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 63 lines/page -\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=58\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 58 lines/page -\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=52\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 52 lines/page -\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=50\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 50 lines/page + +% set the default top margin to 58pt +% which results in a \topmargin of -49.59pt for 10pt documents +\IEEEsettopmargin{t}{58pt} +% tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/column. +% standard is: 9pt/63 lpc; 10pt/58 lpc; 11pt/52 lpc; 12pt/50 lpc +\IEEEquantizetextheight{c} +% tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom +\IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp} \columnsep 1pc \textwidth 43pc % 2 x 21pc + 1pc = 43pc - -% the default side margins are equal -\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper -\oddsidemargin 14.32mm -\evensidemargin 14.32mm -\else -\oddsidemargin 0.680in -\evensidemargin 0.680in -\fi -% compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset -\addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in} -\addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in} +% set the default side margins to center the text +\IEEEsetsidemargin{c}{0pt} - -% adjust margins for conference mode +% adjust margins for default conference mode \ifCLASSOPTIONconference - \topmargin -0.25in - % we retain the reserved, but unused space for headers - \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight} - \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep} \textheight 9.25in % The standard for conferences (668.4975pt) - % Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page. - \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=61\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 61 lines/page - \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=56\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 56 lines/page - \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=50\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 50 lines/page - \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=48\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 48 lines/page + \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{0.75in} + % tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page. + % standard is: 9pt/61 lpc; 10pt/56 lpc; 11pt/50 lpc; 12pt/48 lpc + \IEEEquantizetextheight{c} + % tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom + \IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp} \fi -% compsoc conference +% compsoc text sizes, margins and spacings \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc -\ifCLASSOPTIONconference - % compsoc conference use a larger value for columnsep - \columnsep 0.375in - % compsoc conferences want 1in top margin, 1.125in bottom margin - \topmargin 0in - \addtolength{\topmargin}{-6pt}% we tweak this a tad to better comply with top of line stuff - % we retain the reserved, but unused space for headers - \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight} - \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep} - \textheight 8.875in % (641.39625pt) - % Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page. - \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=58\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 58 lines/page - \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=53\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 53 lines/page - \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=48\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 48 lines/page - \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=46\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 46 lines/page - \textwidth 6.5in - % the default side margins are equal - \if@IEEEusingAfourpaper - \oddsidemargin 22.45mm - \evensidemargin 22.45mm - \else - \oddsidemargin 1in - \evensidemargin 1in + \columnsep 12bp + % CS specs for \textwdith are 6.875in + % \textwidth 6.875in + % however, measurements from proofs show they are using 3.5in columns + \textwidth 7in + \advance\textwidth by \columnsep + % set the side margins to center the text + \IEEEsetsidemargin{c}{0pt} + % top/bottom margins to center + % could just set \textheight to 9.75in for all the different paper sizes + % and then quantize, but we'll do it the long way here to allow for easy + % future per-paper size adjustments + \IEEEsettextheight{0.625in}{0.625in}% 11in - 2 * 0.625in = 9.75in is the standard text height for compsoc journals + \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{0.625in} + \if@IEEEusingcspaper + \IEEEsettextheight{0.5in}{0.5in}% 10.75in - 2 * 0.5in = 9.75in + \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{0.5in} \fi - % compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset - \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in} - \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in} -\fi\fi + \if@IEEEusingAfourpaper + \IEEEsettextheight{24.675mm}{24.675mm}% 297mm - 2 * 24.675mm = 247.650mm (9.75in) + \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{24.675mm} + \fi + % tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page. + % standard is: 9pt/65 lpc; 10pt/61 lpc; 11pt/53 lpc; 12pt/49 lpc + \IEEEquantizetextheight{c} + % tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom + \IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp} + +% compsoc conference + \ifCLASSOPTIONconference + % compsoc conference use a larger value for columnsep + \columnsep 0.25in + \IEEEsettextwidth{0.75in}{0.75in} + % set the side margins to center the text (0.75in for letterpaper) + \IEEEsetsidemargin{c}{0pt} + % compsoc conferences want 1in top and bottom margin + \IEEEsettextheight{1in}{1in} + \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{1in} + % tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page. + % standard is: 9pt/58 lpc; 10pt/53 lpc; 11pt/48 lpc; 12pt/46 lpc + \IEEEquantizetextheight{c} + % tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom + \IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp} + \fi +\fi % draft mode settings override that of all other modes % provides a nice 1in margin all around the paper and extra % space between the lines for editor's comments -\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls - % want 1in from top of paper to text - \setlength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}% - \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}% +\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls % we want 1in side margins regardless of paper type - \oddsidemargin 0in - \evensidemargin 0in - % set the text width - \setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth}% - \addtolength{\textwidth}{-2.0in}% - \setlength{\textheight}{\paperheight}% - \addtolength{\textheight}{-2.0in}% + \IEEEsettextwidth{1in}{1in} + \IEEEsetsidemargin{c}{0pt} + % want 1in top and bottom margins + \IEEEsettextheight{1in}{1in} + \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{1in} % digitize textheight to be an integer number of lines. - % this may cause the bottom margin to be off a tad - \addtolength{\textheight}{-1\topskip}% - \divide\textheight by \baselineskip% - \multiply\textheight by \baselineskip% - \addtolength{\textheight}{\topskip}% + % this may cause the top and bottom margins to be off a tad + \IEEEquantizetextheight{c} + % tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom + \IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp} \fi @@ -898,17 +1783,8 @@ \ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined \edef\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin} \fi - \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} - \ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside - \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin} - \else - \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} - \fi - \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in} - \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in} - \setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth} - \addtolength{\textwidth}{-\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} - \addtolength{\textwidth}{-\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin} + \IEEEsettextwidth{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin} + \IEEEsetsidemargin{i}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding inner side margin to \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\space and outer side margin to \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.} \fi @@ -930,25 +1806,53 @@ \ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined \edef\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin{\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin} \fi - \setlength{\topmargin}{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin} - \addtolength{\topmargin}{-1in} - \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight} - \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep} - \setlength{\textheight}{\paperheight} - \addtolength{\textheight}{-\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin} - \addtolength{\textheight}{-\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin} - % in the default format we use the normal baselineskip as topskip - % we only need 0.7 of this to clear typical top text and we need - % an extra 0.3 spacing at the bottom for descenders. This will - % correct for both. - \addtolength{\topmargin}{-0.3\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip} + \IEEEsettextheight{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}{\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin} + \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin} \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding top text margin to \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\space and bottom text margin to \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.} \fi +% default to center header and footer text in the margins +\IEEEsetheadermargin{c}{0pt} +\IEEEsetfootermargin{c}{0pt} +% adjust header and footer positions for compsoc journals +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc + \ifCLASSOPTIONjournal + \IEEEsetheadermargin{b}{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip} + \IEEEsetfootermargin{t}{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip} + \fi +\fi + + +% V1.8a display lines per column info message on user's console +\def\IEEEdisplayinfolinespercolumn{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\textheight +% topskip represents only one line even if > baselineskip +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -1\topskip +\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA +\@IEEEtrantmpcountB=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA +\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by \baselineskip +% need to add one line to include topskip (first) line +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by 1 +% save lines per column value as text +\edef\@IEEEnumlinespercolumninfotxt{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountB} +% backout topskip advance to allow direct \@IEEEtrantmpcountA comparison +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by -1 +% restore value as text height (without topskip) rather than just as number of lines +\multiply\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by \baselineskip +% is the column height an integer number of lines per column? +\ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpcountB +\edef\@IEEEnumlinespercolumnexactinfotxt{exact} +\else +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEtrantmpcountA sp\relax +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpcountB sp\relax +\edef\@IEEEnumlinespercolumnexactinfotxt{approximate, difference = \the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA} +\fi +\typeout{-- Lines per column: \@IEEEnumlinespercolumninfotxt\space (\@IEEEnumlinespercolumnexactinfotxt).}} +% delay execution till start of document to allow for user changes +\AtBeginDocument{\IEEEdisplayinfolinespercolumn} @@ -1131,6 +2035,9 @@ % This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED % list labels and the list text, when normal text is used for % the labels. +% compsoc uses a larger value here, but we'll set that later +% in the class so that this code block area can be extracted +% as-is for IEEEtrantools.sty \newdimen\IEEEiednormlabelsep \IEEEiednormlabelsep 0.6em @@ -1144,6 +2051,9 @@ % This controls the extra vertical separation put above and % below each IED list. IEEE usually puts a little extra spacing % around each list. However, this spacing is barely noticeable. +% compsoc uses a larger value here, but we'll set that later +% in the class so that this code block area can be extracted +% as-is for IEEEtrantools.sty \newskip\IEEEiedtopsep \IEEEiedtopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt @@ -1460,6 +2370,14 @@ \makebox[\labelwidth][r]{\normalfont #1}\fi\fi} +% compsoc uses a larger value for the normal labelsep +% and also extra spacing above and below each list +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc + \IEEEiednormlabelsep 1.2em + \IEEEiedtopsep 6pt plus 3pt minus 3pt +\fi + + % VERSE and QUOTE % V1.7 define environments with newenvironment \newenvironment{verse}{\let\\=\@centercr @@ -1476,7 +2394,6 @@ % \titlepage % provided only for backward compatibility. \maketitle is the correct % way to create the title page. -\newif\if@restonecol \def\titlepage{\@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn \else \newpage \fi \thispagestyle{empty}\c@page\z@} \def\endtitlepage{\if@restonecol\twocolumn \else \newpage \fi} @@ -1638,7 +2555,7 @@ \def\indexname{Index} \def\figurename{Fig.} \def\tablename{TABLE} -\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\figurename{Figure}\def\tablename{Table}} +\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\figurename{Figure}} \def\partname{Part} \def\appendixname{Appendix} \def\abstractname{Abstract} @@ -1685,7 +2602,7 @@ \floatsep 0.85\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip \textfloatsep 1.55\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.4\baselineskip \@fptop 0pt plus 1fil -\@fpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil +\@fpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil \@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil \def\topfraction{0.9} \def\bottomfraction{0.4} @@ -1727,6 +2644,10 @@ % but only \abovecaptionskip is used above figure captions and *below* table % captions \setlength\abovecaptionskip{0.5\baselineskip} +% compsoc journals are a little more generous +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONjournal + \setlength\abovecaptionskip{0.75\baselineskip} +\fi\fi \setlength\belowcaptionskip{0pt} % V1.6 create hooks in case the caption spacing ever needs to be % overridden by a user @@ -1762,19 +2683,19 @@ % test if is a for a figure or table \ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring% % if a table, do table caption -\normalsize\bgroup\par\centering\@IEEEtabletopskipstrut{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}\nobreakspace #2}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup% +\footnotesize\bgroup\par\centering\@IEEEtabletopskipstrut{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace\scshape #2}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup% \@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace % if not a table, format it as a figure \else \@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace -\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}\nobreakspace #2}% +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace #2}% \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize% % if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around -\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}\nobreakspace}% -\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}% +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace}% +\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\footnotesize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}% % if caption is shorter than a line, center \else% -\hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% +\hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% \fi\fi} % \else% nonconference compsoc @@ -1782,19 +2703,19 @@ % test if is a for a figure or table \ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring% % if a table, do table caption -\normalsize\bgroup\par\centering\@IEEEtabletopskipstrut{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize #1}\\{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize #2}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup% +\footnotesize\bgroup\par\centering\@IEEEtabletopskipstrut{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize #1}\\{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize #2}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup% \@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace % if not a table, format it as a figure \else \@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace -\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}\nobreakspace #2}% +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace #2}% \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize% % if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around -\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}\nobreakspace}% -\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}% +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace}% +\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}% % if caption is shorter than a line, left justify \else% -\hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% +\hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% \fi\fi} \fi % @@ -1872,6 +2793,174 @@ +%% -- Command Argument Scanning Support Functions -- +%% V1.8a + +% usage: \@IEEEstripouterbraces*{} +% \@IEEEstripouterbraces fully expands its argument (which it then stores +% in \@IEEEstripouterbracesarg) via \edef, then removes any outer enclosing +% braces, and finally stores the result in the macro +% \@IEEEstrippedouterbraces. +% +% For example: +% \@IEEEstripouterbraces{{{{ab}c}}} +% results in: +% +% \@IEEEstripouterbracesarg ==> a macro containing {{{ab}c}} +% \@IEEEstrippedouterbraces ==> a macro containing {ab}c +% +% the *-star form,\@IEEEstripouterbraces*, does not expand the argument +% contents during processing +\def\@IEEEstripouterbraces{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEstripouterbracesdef=\def\@@IEEEstripouterbraces}{\let\@IEEEstripouterbracesdef=\edef\@@IEEEstripouterbraces}} + +\def\@@IEEEstripouterbraces#1{\@IEEEstripouterbracesdef\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg{#1}\relax +% If the macro is unchanged after being acquired as a single delimited +% argument, we know we have one sequence of tokens without any enclosing +% braces. Loop until this is true. +\loop + \expandafter\@@@IEEEstripouterbraces\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER +\ifx\@IEEEstrippedouterbraces\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg +\else + \let\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg\@IEEEstrippedouterbraces +\repeat} + +\def\@@@IEEEstripouterbraces#1\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER{\def\@IEEEstrippedouterbraces{#1}} + + + +% usage: \@IEEEextractgroup*{} +% \@IEEEextractgroup fully expands its argument (which it then stores in +% \@IEEEextractgrouparg) via \edef and then assigns the first "brace group" +% of tokens to the macro \@IEEEextractedgroup. +% The remaining groups, if any, are stored in the macro +% \@IEEEextractedgroupremain. If the argument does not contain the requisite +% groups, the respective macros will be defined to be empty. +% There is an asymmetry in that \@IEEEextractedgroup is stripped of its first +% outer grouping while \@IEEEextractedgroupremain retains even the outer +% grouping (if present) that originally identified it as a group. +% +% For example: +% \@IEEEextractgroup{{{ab}}{c{de}}} +% results in: +% +% \@IEEEextractgrouparg ==> a macro containing {{ab}}{c{de}} +% \@IEEEextractedgroup ==> a macro containing {ab} +% \@IEEEextractedgroupremain ==> a macro containing {c{de}} +% +% The *-star form, \@IEEEextractgroup*, does not expand its argument +% contents during processing. +\def\@IEEEextractgroup{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEextractgroupdef=\def\@@IEEEextractgroup}{\let\@IEEEextractgroupdef=\edef\@@IEEEextractgroup}} + +\def\@@IEEEextractgroup#1{\@IEEEextractgroupdef\@IEEEextractgrouparg{#1}\relax +% trap the case of an empty extracted group as this would cause problems with +% \@IEEEextractgroupremain's argument acquisition +\ifx\@IEEEextractgrouparg\@empty + \def\@IEEEextractedgroup{}\relax + \def\@IEEEextractedgroupremain{}\relax +\else + % We have to use some dirty tricks here. We want to insert {} around + % whatever remains after the first group so that TeX's argument scanner + % will preserve any originally enclosing braces as well as provide an + % empty argument to acquire even if there isn't a second group. + % In this first of two dirty tricks, we put a } at the end of the structure + % we are going to extract from. The \ifnum0=`{\fi keeps TeX happy to allow + % what would otherwise be an unbalanced macro definition for + % \@@IEEEextractgroup to be acceptable to it. + \ifnum0=`{\fi\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroupremain\@IEEEextractgrouparg}\relax +\fi} + +% In the second part of the dirty tricks, we insert a leading { right after +% the first group is acquired, but before the remainder is. Again, the +% \ifnum0=`}\fi keeps TeX happy during definition time, but will disappear +% during run time. +\def\@IEEEextractgroupremain#1{\def\@IEEEextractedgroup{#1}\expandafter\@@IEEEextractgroupremain\expandafter{\ifnum0=`}\fi} + +\def\@@IEEEextractgroupremain#1{\def\@IEEEextractedgroupremain{#1}} + + + +% \@IEEEextracttoken relocated at top because margin setting commands rely on it + + + +% usage: \@IEEEextracttokengroups*{} +% \@IEEEextracttokengroups fully expands its argument (which it then stores +% in \@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg) and then assigns the first "brace group" of +% tokens (with the outermost braces removed) to the macro +% \@IEEEextractedfirstgroup. +% The meaning of the first nonbrace (but including the empty group) token +% within this first group is assigned via \let to \@IEEEextractedfirsttoken +% as well as stored in the macro \@IEEEextractedfirsttokenmacro. If a first +% nonbrace token does not exist (or is an empty group), these will be \relax +% and empty, respectively. Tokens that would otherwise be discarded during +% the acquisition of the first token in the first group are stored in +% \@IEEEextractedfirsttokensdiscarded, however their original relative brace +% nesting depths are not guaranteed to be preserved. +% The first group within this first group is stored in the macro +% \@IEEEextractedfirstfirstgroup. +% Likewise for the next group after the first: \@IEEEextractednextgroup, +% \@IEEEextractednextfirstgroup, \@IEEEextractednextgroupfirsttoken, +% \@IEEEextractednextgroupfirsttokenmacro, and +% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttokensdiscarded. +% All tokens/groups after the first group, including any enclosing braces, +% are stored in the macro \@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain which will +% be empty if none exist. +% +% For example: +% \@IEEEextracttokengroups{{{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g}} +% will result in: +% +% \@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg ==> a macro containing {{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g} +% \@IEEEextractedfirstgroup ==> a macro containing {ab}{cd} +% \@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain ==> a macro containing {{ef}g} +% \@IEEEextractedfirsttoken ==> the letter a +% \@IEEEextractedfirsttokenmacro ==> a macro containing a +% \@IEEEextractedfirsttokensdiscarded ==> a macro containing bcd +% \@IEEEextractedfirstfirstgroup ==> a macro containing ab +% \@IEEEextractednextgroup ==> a macro containing {ef}g +% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttoken ==> the letter e +% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttokenmacro ==> a macro containing e +% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttokensdiscarded ==> a macro containing fg +% \@IEEEextractednextfirstgroup ==> a macro containing ef +% +% If given an empty argument, \@IEEEextractedfirsttoken and +% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttoken will be set to \relax +% and all the macros will be empty. +% the *-star form, \@IEEEextracttokengroups*, does not expand its argument +% contents during processing. +% +% Depends on: \@IEEEextractgroup, \@IEEEextracttoken +\def\@IEEEextracttokengroups{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEextracttokengroupsdef=\def\@@IEEEextracttokengroups}{\let\@IEEEextracttokengroupsdef=\edef\@@IEEEextracttokengroups}} +\def\@@IEEEextracttokengroups#1{\@IEEEextracttokengroupsdef\@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg{#1}\relax +% begin extraction, these functions are safe with empty arguments +% first group +\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg}\relax +\let\@IEEEextractedfirstgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup +\let\@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain\@IEEEextractedgroupremain +\expandafter\@IEEEextracttoken\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractedfirstgroup}\relax +\let\@IEEEextractedfirsttoken\@IEEEextractedtoken +\let\@IEEEextractedfirsttokenmacro\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro +\let\@IEEEextractedfirsttokensdiscarded\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded +% first first group +\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractedfirstgroup}\relax +\let\@IEEEextractedfirstfirstgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup +% next group +\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain}\relax +\let\@IEEEextractednextgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup +\expandafter\@IEEEextracttoken\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractednextgroup}\relax +\let\@IEEEextractednextfirsttoken\@IEEEextractedtoken +\let\@IEEEextractednextfirsttokenmacro\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro +\let\@IEEEextractednextfirsttokensdiscarded\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded +% next first group +\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractednextgroup}\relax +\let\@IEEEextractednextfirstgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup} + + +%% -- End of Command Argument Scanning Support Functions -- + + + + %% %% START OF IEEEeqnarray DEFINITIONS %% @@ -1882,9 +2971,6 @@ %% I don't make the claim that my work here is even near their calibre. ;) -% hook to allow easy changeover to IEEEtran.cls/tools.sty error reporting -\def\@IEEEclspkgerror{\ClassError{IEEEtran}} - \newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojot% flag to indicate if the environment was called as the star form \@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojotfalse @@ -2533,7 +3619,7 @@ Using a default centering column instead}% #1\relax% allow user to override defaults \let\\\@IEEEeqnarraycr% replace newline with one that can put in eqn. numbers \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@% col. count = 0 for first line - \@IEEEbuildpreamble #2\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA + \@IEEEbuildpreamble{#2}\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA % put in the column for the equation number \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first \toks0={##}% @@ -2728,7 +3814,7 @@ $$\@ignoretrue} \IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides #1\relax% allow user to override defaults \let\\\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr% replace newline with one that allows optional spacing - \@IEEEbuildpreamble #4\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA + \@IEEEbuildpreamble{#4}\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA % add an isolation column to the preamble to stop \\'s {} from getting into the last col \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first \toks0={##}% @@ -2739,16 +3825,15 @@ $$\@ignoretrue} % begin the alignment \everycr{}% % use only the very first token to determine the positioning - % this stops some problems when the user uses more than one letter, - % but is probably not worth the effort - % \noindent is used as a delimiter - \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% - \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#2\relax\relax\noindent - % \@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded + \@IEEEextracttoken{#2}\relax + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else + \typeout{** WARNING: IEEEeqnarraybox position specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax + \fi + % \@IEEEextractedtoken has the first token, the rest are ignored % if we need to put things into and hbox and go into math mode, do so now \if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW \leavevmode \hbox \bgroup $\fi% % use the appropriate vbox type - \if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken t\relax\vtop\else\if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken c\relax% + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax\vtop\else\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax% \vcenter\else\vbox\fi\fi\bgroup% \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines \ifx#3\relax\halign\else\halign to #3\relax\fi% @@ -2796,8 +3881,10 @@ $$\@ignoretrue} -% starts the halign preamble build -\def\@IEEEbuildpreamble{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register +% usage: \@IEEEbuildpreamble{column specifiers} +% starts the halign preamble build +% the assembled preamble is put in \@IEEEtrantmptoksA +\def\@IEEEbuildpreamble#1{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register \let\@IEEEBPcurtype=u%current column type is not yet known \let\@IEEEBPprevtype=s%the previous column type was the start \let\@IEEEBPnexttype=u%next column type is not yet known @@ -2813,17 +3900,19 @@ $$\@ignoretrue} % record the default end glues \edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart}% \edef\@IEEEBPendglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend}% +\edef\@IEEEedefMACRO{#1}\relax% fully expand the preamble to support macro containers % now parse the user's column specifications -\@@IEEEbuildpreamble} +% \ignorespaces is used as a delimiter, need at least one trailing \relax because +% \@@IEEEbuildpreamble looks into the future +\expandafter\@@IEEEbuildpreamble\@IEEEedefMACRO\ignorespaces\relax\relax} +% usage: \@@IEEEbuildpreamble{current column}{next column} % parses and builds the halign preamble \def\@@IEEEbuildpreamble#1#2{\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEbuildpreamble% % use only the very first token to check the end -% \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here -\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% -\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent -\ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEfinishpreamble\else% +\@IEEEextracttokengroups{#1}\relax +\ifx\@IEEEextractedfirsttoken\ignorespaces\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEfinishpreamble\else% % identify current and next token type \@IEEEgetcoltype{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurtype}{1}% current, error on invalid \@IEEEgetcoltype{#2}{\@IEEEBPnexttype}{0}% next, no error on invalid next @@ -2843,8 +3932,10 @@ $$\@ignoretrue} \fi\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble{#2}} +% usage: \@@IEEEfinishpreamble{discarded} % executed just after preamble build is completed % warn about zero cols, and if prevtype type = u, put in end tabskip glue +% argument is not used \def\@@IEEEfinishpreamble#1{\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols<1\relax \@IEEEclspkgerror{No column specifiers declared for IEEEeqnarray}% {At least one column type must be declared for each IEEEeqnarray.}% @@ -2853,42 +3944,44 @@ $$\@ignoretrue} \if\@IEEEBPprevtype u\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue}\fi} -% Identify and return the column specifier's type code -\def\@IEEEgetcoltype#1#2#3{% -% use only the very first token to determine the type -% \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here -\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% -\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent -% \@IEEEgrabfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded +% usage: \@IEEEgetcoltype{col specifier}{\output}{error more} +% Identify and return the column specifier's type code in the given +% \output macro: % n = number % g = glue (any other char in catagory 12) % c = letter -% e = \end +% e = \ignorespaces (end of sequence) % u = undefined -% third argument: 0 = no error message, 1 = error on invalid char +% error mode: 0 = no error message, 1 = error on invalid char +\def\@IEEEgetcoltype#1#2#3{% +% use only the very first token to determine the type +\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax +% \@IEEEextractedtoken has the first token, the rest are discarded \let#2=u\relax% assume invalid until know otherwise -\ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let#2=e\else -\ifcat\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\relax\else% screen out control sequences -\if0\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else -\if1\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else -\if2\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else -\if3\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else -\if4\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else -\if5\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else -\if6\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else -\if7\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else -\if8\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else -\if9\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else -\ifcat,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=g\relax -\else\ifcat a\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=c\relax\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtoken\ignorespaces\let#2=e\else +\ifcat\@IEEEextractedtoken\relax\else% screen out control sequences +\if0\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else +\if1\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else +\if2\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else +\if3\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else +\if4\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else +\if5\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else +\if6\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else +\if7\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else +\if8\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else +\if9\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else +\ifcat,\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=g\relax +\else\ifcat a\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=c\relax\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi \if#2u\relax \if0\noexpand#3\relax\else\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid character in column specifications}% {Only letters, numerals and certain other symbols are allowed \MessageBreak as IEEEeqnarray column specifiers.}\fi\fi} -% identify the current letter referenced column -% if invalid, use a default column +% usage: \@IEEEgetcurcol{col specifier} +% verify the letter referenced column exists +% and return its name in \@IEEEBPcurcolname +% if column specifier is invalid, use the default column @IEEEdefault \def\@IEEEgetcurcol#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined% \def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{#1}\else% invalid column name \@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#1" in column specifications.\MessageBreak @@ -2897,7 +3990,9 @@ Using a default centering column instead}% \def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}\fi} -% identify and return the predefined (punctuation) glue value +% usage: \@IEEEgetcurglue{glue specifier}{\output} +% identify the predefined (punctuation) glue value +% and return it in the given output macro \def\@IEEEgetcurglue#1#2{% % ! = \! (neg small) -0.16667em (-3/18 em) % , = \, (small) 0.16667em ( 3/18 em) @@ -2915,10 +4010,10 @@ Using a default centering column instead}% % value for 1em. % % use only the very first token to determine the type -% this prevents errant tokens from getting in the main text -% \noindent is used as a delimiter here -\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% -\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent +\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else + \typeout{** WARNING: IEEEeqnarray predefined inter-column glue type specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax +\fi % get the math font 1em value % LaTeX2e's NFSS2 does not preload the fonts, but \IEEEeqnarray needs % to gain access to the math (\textfont2) font's spacing parameters. @@ -2931,18 +4026,18 @@ Using a default centering column instead}% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\fontdimen6\textfont2\relax% % identify the glue value based on the first token % we discard anything after the first -\if!\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=-0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else -\if,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else -\if:\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.22222\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else -\if;\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.27778\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else -\if'\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else -\if"\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else -\if.\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.5\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else -\if/\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\the\arraycolsep}\else -\if?\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else -\if *\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{0pt plus 1fil minus 0pt}\else -\if+\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}\else -\if-\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}\else +\if!\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=-0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if,\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if:\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.22222\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if;\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.27778\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if'\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if"\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if.\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.5\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if/\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{\the\arraycolsep}\else +\if?\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if *\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{0pt plus 1fil minus 0pt}\else +\if+\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}\else +\if-\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}\else \edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% \@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid predefined inter-column glue type "#1" in\MessageBreak column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak @@ -2951,7 +4046,7 @@ column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} - +% usage: \@IEEEprocessNcol{digit} % process a numerical digit from the column specification % and look up the corresponding user defined glue value % can transform current type from n to g or a as the user defined glue is acquired @@ -3159,11 +4254,11 @@ between column types.}% % do not repeat pubid if using peer review option \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview \else - \footskip 0pt% \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc - \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% - \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% + \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{0ex}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% + \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{0ex}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% \else + \footskip 0pt% \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% \fi @@ -3184,11 +4279,11 @@ between column types.}% \else % non-draft mode footers \if@IEEEusingpubid - \footskip 0pt% \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc - \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% - \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% + \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{0ex}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% + \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{0ex}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% \else + \footskip 0pt% \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% \fi @@ -3296,19 +4391,19 @@ between column types.}% \def\@biblabel#1{[#1]} -% compsoc journals left align the reference numbers -\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]\hfill}} +% compsoc journals and conferences left align the reference numbers +\@IEEEcompsoconly{\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]\hfill}} % controls bib item spacing \def\IEEEbibitemsep{0pt plus .5pt} -\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\IEEEbibitemsep{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}} +\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\IEEEbibitemsep{0.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}} \def\thebibliography#1{\section*{\refname}% \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\refname}% % V1.6 add some rubber space here and provide a command trigger - \footnotesize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\small}\vskip 0.3\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip% + \footnotesize\vskip 0.3\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip% \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}% \leftmargin\labelwidth @@ -3368,8 +4463,8 @@ between column types.}% % FONT CONTROLS AND SPACINGS FOR CONFERENCE MODE AUTHOR NAME AND AFFILIATION BLOCKS % % The default font styles for the author name and affiliation blocks (confmode) -\def\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\large}} -\def\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\itshape}\normalsize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\large}} +\def\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize} +\def\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\itshape}\normalsize} % The default if the user does not use an author block \def\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize} @@ -3564,6 +4659,8 @@ between column types.}% \hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\fi\fi\fi} + + % user command to invoke the title page \def\maketitle{\par% \begingroup% @@ -3584,7 +4681,7 @@ between column types.}% \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext% \else - \twocolumn[\@maketitle\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace\@IEEEaftertitletext]% + \twocolumn[{\IEEEquantizevspace{\@maketitle}[\IEEEquantizedisabletitlecmds]{0pt}[-\topskip]{\baselineskip}{\@IEEENORMtitlevspace}{\@IEEEMINtitlevspace}\@IEEEaftertitletext}]% \fi \else \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext% @@ -3603,12 +4700,12 @@ between column types.}% \let\thanks\relax} - % V1.8 parbox to format \@IEEEtitleabstractindextext \long\def\@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox#1{\parbox{1\textwidth}{#1}} % V1.8 compsoc is partial width \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc -\long\def\@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox#1{\parbox{0.915\textwidth}{#1}} +% comparison with proofs suggests it's in the range of 92.1-92.3% +\long\def\@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox#1{\parbox{0.922\textwidth}{\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\rightskip\@flushglue\leftskip\z@skip}#1}} \fi % formats the Title, authors names, affiliations and special paper notice @@ -3616,14 +4713,13 @@ between column types.}% % spaces to enter the definition - use % at the end of each line \def\@maketitle{\newpage \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering% -\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technotes - {\bfseries\large\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@title\par}\vskip 1.3em{\lineskip .5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@author - \@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax - \@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext}\par - \hfill\@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technotes, V1.8a abstract and index terms are not treated differently for compsoc technotes + {\bfseries\large\@IEEEcompsoconly{\Large\sffamily}\@title\par}\vskip 1.3em{\lineskip .5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\large\sffamily}\@author + \@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par}\relax \else% not a technote \vskip0.2em{\Huge\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag\bfseries\LARGE\fi\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\normalfont\normalsize\vskip 2\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip - \bfseries\Large}\@title\par}\vskip1.0em\par% + \bfseries\Large}\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\vskip 0.75\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}\@title\par}\relax + \@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\vskip 0.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}\vskip1.0em\par% % V1.6 handle \author differently if in conference mode \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% {\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace% @@ -3634,8 +4730,8 @@ between column types.}% {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace% \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax - \@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext}\par\hfill - \@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax + \@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext}\par\noindent\hfill + \IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax \else% journal, peerreview or transmag \ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag % transmag also handles author names just like conference mode @@ -3647,19 +4743,44 @@ between column types.}% \else% journal or peerreview {\lineskip.5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@author\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax - \@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext}\par\hfill - \@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax + \@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext}\par\noindent\hfill + \IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax \fi \fi \fi \fi\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup} - % V1.7 Computer Society "diamond line" which follows index terms for nonconference papers -\def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondline{\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\hspace{7.5pt}% -\raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}% -\hspace{7.5pt}\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\relax} +% V1.8a full width diamond line for single column use +\def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlinei{\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\nobreak\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak +\raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}\nobreak +\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\relax} +% V1.8a narrower width diamond line for double column use +\def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineii{\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 2.5cm\nobreak\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak +\raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}\nobreak +\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 2.5cm\relax} +% V1.8a bare core without rules to base a last resort on for very narrow linewidths +\def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineiii{\mbox{}\nobreak\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak +\raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}\nobreak +\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak\mbox{}\relax} + +% V1.8a allow \IEEEcompsocdiamondline to adjust for different linewidths. +% Use \@IEEEcompsocdiamondlinei if its width is less than 0.66\linewidth (0.487 nominal for single column) +% if not, fall back to \@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineii if its width is less than 0.75\linewidth (0.659 nominal for double column) +% if all else fails, try to make a custom diamondline based on the abnormally narrow linewidth +\def\IEEEcompsocdiamondline{\settowidth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlinei}\relax +\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA<0.66\linewidth\relax\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlinei\relax +\else +\settowidth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineii}\relax +\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA<0.75\linewidth\relax\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineii\relax +\else +\settowidth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineiii}\relax +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=\linewidth\relax +\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{-1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\relax +\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 0.33\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineiii\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 0.33\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax +\fi\fi} + % V1.7 standard LateX2e \thanks, but with \itshape under compsoc. Also make it a \long\def % We also need to trigger the one-shot footnote rule @@ -3672,6 +4793,7 @@ between column types.}% \protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule\relax}\ignorespaces#1}}} \let\@thanks\@empty + % V1.7 allow \author to contain \par's. This is needed to allow \thanks to contain \par. \long\def\author#1{\gdef\@author{#1}} @@ -3679,7 +4801,7 @@ between column types.}% % in addition to setting up IEEEitemize, we need to remove a baselineskip space above and % below it because \list's \pars introduce blank lines because of the footnote struts. \def\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist{\def\labelitemi{$\bullet$}% -\setlength{\IEEElabelindent}{0pt}\setlength{\parskip}{0pt}% +\setlength{\IEEElabelindent}{0pt}\setlength{\labelsep}{1.2em}\setlength{\parskip}{0pt}% \setlength{\partopsep}{0pt}\setlength{\topsep}{0.5\baselineskip}\vspace{-1\baselineskip}\relax} @@ -3688,7 +4810,7 @@ between column types.}% \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc % V1.7 compsoc bullet item \thanks -% also, we need to redefine this to destroy the argument in \@IEEEdynamictitlevspace +% also, we need to redefine this to destroy the argument in \IEEEquantizevspace \long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\relax\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse\footnotemark \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\itshape\protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule @@ -3711,7 +4833,7 @@ between column types.}% \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview \def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\@IEEEcleardoublepage{empty}% \ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn -\twocolumn[\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace] +\twocolumn[{\IEEEquantizevspace{\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle}[\IEEEquantizedisabletitlecmds]{0pt}[-\topskip]{\baselineskip}{\@IEEENORMtitlevspace}{\@IEEEMINtitlevspace}}] \else \newpage\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip \fi @@ -3752,95 +4874,253 @@ between column types.}% \fi}} -% V1.6 -% This is a dynamically determined rigid spacer between the title/authors -% and the main text. This is used only for single column titles over two -% column text (most common) -% This is bit tricky because we have to ensure that the textheight of the -% main text is an integer multiple of \baselineskip -% otherwise underfull vbox problems may develop in the second column of the -% text on the titlepage -% The possible use of \IEEEpubid must also be taken into account. -\def\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace{{% - % we run within a group so that all the macros can be forgotten when we are done - \long\def\thanks##1{\relax}%don't allow \thanks to run when we evaluate the vbox height - \long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks##1{\relax}%don't allow \IEEEcompsocitemizethanks to run when we evaluate the vbox height - \normalfont\normalsize% we declare more descriptive variable names - \let\@IEEEmaintextheight=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%height of the main text columns - \let\@IEEEINTmaintextheight=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%height of the main text columns with integer # lines - % set the nominal and minimum values for the title spacer - % the dynamic algorithm will not allow the spacer size to - % become less than \@IEEEMINtitlevspace - instead it will be - % lengthened - % default to journal values - \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{2.5\baselineskip}% - \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{2\baselineskip}% - % conferences and technotes need tighter spacing - \ifCLASSOPTIONconference%conference - \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}% - \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}% - \fi - \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%technote - \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}% - \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}% - \fi% - % get the height that the title will take up - \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview - \settoheight{\@IEEEmaintextheight}{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth \@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle}}% - \else - \settoheight{\@IEEEmaintextheight}{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth \@maketitle}}% - \fi - \@IEEEmaintextheight=-\@IEEEmaintextheight% title takes away from maintext, so reverse sign - % add the height of the page textheight - \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by \textheight% - % correct for title pages using pubid - \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else - % peerreview papers use the pubid on the cover page only. - % And the cover page uses a static spacer. - \if@IEEEusingpubid\advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\@IEEEpubidpullup\fi - \fi% - % subtract off the nominal value of the title bottom spacer - \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\@IEEENORMtitlevspace% - % \topskip takes away some too - \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\topskip% - % calculate the column height of the main text for lines - % now we calculate the main text height as if holding - % an integer number of \normalsize lines after the first - % and discard any excess fractional remainder - % we subtracted the first line, because the first line - % is placed \topskip into the maintext, not \baselineskip like the - % rest of the lines. - \@IEEEINTmaintextheight=\@IEEEmaintextheight% - \divide\@IEEEINTmaintextheight by \baselineskip% - \multiply\@IEEEINTmaintextheight by \baselineskip% - % now we calculate how much the title spacer height will - % have to be reduced from nominal (\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight is always - % a positive value) so that the maintext area will contain an integer - % number of normal size lines - % we change variable names here (to avoid confusion) as we no longer - % need \@IEEEINTmaintextheight and can reuse its dimen register - \let\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight=\@IEEEINTmaintextheight% - \advance\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight by -\@IEEEmaintextheight% - \advance\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight by \baselineskip% - % this is the calculated height of the spacer - % we change variable names here (to avoid confusion) as we no longer - % need \@IEEEmaintextheight and can reuse its dimen register - \let\@IEEECOMPENSATElen=\@IEEEmaintextheight% - \@IEEECOMPENSATElen=\@IEEENORMtitlevspace% set the nominal value - % we go with the reduced length if it is smaller than an increase - \ifdim\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight < 0.5\baselineskip\relax% - \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by -\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight% - % if the resulting spacer is too small back out and go with an increase instead - \ifdim\@IEEECOMPENSATElen<\@IEEEMINtitlevspace\relax% - \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by \baselineskip% - \fi% - \else% - % go with an increase because it is closer to the nominal than a decrease - \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by -\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight% - \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by \baselineskip% - \fi% - % set the calculated rigid spacer - \vspace{\@IEEECOMPENSATElen}}} +% set the nominal and minimum values for the quantized title spacer +% the quantization algorithm will not allow the spacer size to +% become less than \@IEEEMINtitlevspace - instead it will be lengthened +% default to journal values +\def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{2.5\baselineskip} +\def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{2\baselineskip} +% conferences and technotes need tighter spacing +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% conference + \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip} + \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip} +\fi +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technote + \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip} + \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip} +\fi + + +% V1.8a +\def\IEEEquantizevspace{\begingroup\@ifstar{\@IEEEquantizevspacestarformtrue\@IEEEquantizevspace}{\@IEEEquantizevspacestarformfalse\@IEEEquantizevspace}} +% \IEEEquantizevspace[output dimen register]{object}[object decl] +% {top baselineskip} +% [offset][prevdepth][lineskip limit][lineskip] +% {unit height}{nominal vspace}{minimum vspace} +% +% Calculates and creates the vspace needed to make the combined height with +% the given object an integer multiple of the given unit height. This command +% is more general than the older \@IEEEdynamictitlevspace it replaces. +% +% The star form has no effect at present, but is reserved for future use. +% +% If the optional argument [output dimen register] is given, the calculated +% vspace height is stored in the given output dimen (or skip) register +% and no other action is taken, otherwise the object followed by a vspace* +% of the appropriate height is evaluated/output. +% +% The optional object decl (declarations) is code that is evaluated just +% before the object's height is evaluated. Its intented purpose is to allow +% for the alteration or disabling of code within the object during internal +% height evaluation (e.g., \long\def\thanks#1{\relax} ). +% This special code is not invoked if/when the object is rendered at the end. +% +% The nominal vspace is the target value of the added vspace and the minimum +% vspace is the lower allowed limit. The vspacer will be the value that achieves +% integral overall height, in terms of the given unit height, that is closest +% to the nominal vspace and that is not less than the specified minimum vspace. +% +% The line spacing algorithm of TeX is somewhat involved and requires special +% care with regard to the first line of a vertical list (which is indicated +% when \prevdepth is -1000pt or less). top baselineskip specifies the +% baselineskip or topskip used prior to the object. If the height of the +% first line of the object is greater than the given top baselineskip, then +% the top baselineskip is subtracted from the height of the first line and +% that difference is considered along with the rest of the object height +% (because the object will be shifted down by an amount = +% top line height - top baselineskip). Otherwise, the height of the first line +% of the object is ignored as far as the calculations are concerned. +% This algorithm is adequate for objects that appear at the top of a page +% (e.g., titles) where \topskip spacing is used. +% +% However, as explained on page 78 of the TeXbook, interline spacing is more +% complex when \baselineskip is being used (indicated by \prevdepth > +% -1000pt). The four optional parameters offset, prevdepth, lineskip limit and +% lineskip are assumed to be equal to be 0pt, \prevdepth, \lineskiplimit and +% \lineskip, respectively, if they are omitted. +% +% The prevdepth is the depth of the line before the object, the lineskip limit +% specifies how close the top of the object can come to the bottom of the +% previous line before \baselineskip is ignored and \lineskip is inserted +% between the object and the line above it. Lineskip does not come into +% play unless the first line of the object is high enough to "get too close" +% (as specified by lineskiplimit) to the line before it. The the prevdepth, +% lineskip limit, and lineskip optional parameters are not needed for the +% first object/line on a page (i.e., prevdepth <= -1000pt) where the simplier +% \topskip spacing rules are in effect. +% +% Offset is a manual adjustment that is added to the height calculations of +% object irrespective of the value of \prevdepth. It is useful when the top +% baselineskip will result in a noninteger unit height object placement even +% if the object itself has integral height. e.g., a footnotesize baselineskip +% is used before the object, thus an offset of, say -3pt, can be given as a +% correction. + +% Common combinations of these parameters include: +% +% top baselineskip: (and default values for offset, prevdepth, etc.) +% \topskip % for objects that appear at the top of a page +% \maxdimen % always ignore the height of the top line +% 0pt % always consider any positive height of the top line +% +% for objects to appear inline in normal text: +% top baselineskip = \baselineskip +% +% set prevdepth = -1000pt and top baselineskip = 0pt to consider the +% overall height of the object without any other external skip +% consideration + +\newif\if@IEEEquantizevspacestarform % flag to indicate star form +\newif\if@IEEEquantizevspaceuseoutdimenreg % flag to indicate output dimen register is to be used +% Use our own private registers because the object could contain a +% structure that uses the existing tmp scratch pad registers +\newdimen\@IEEEquantizeheightA +\newdimen\@IEEEquantizeheightB +\newdimen\@IEEEquantizeheightC +\newdimen\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth % need to save this early as can change +\newcount\@IEEEquantizemultiple +\newbox\@IEEEquantizeboxA + + +\def\@IEEEquantizevspace{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEquantizevspaceuseoutdimenregtrue\@@IEEEquantizevspace}{\@IEEEquantizevspaceuseoutdimenregfalse\@@IEEEquantizevspace[]}} + + +\long\def\@@IEEEquantizevspace[#1]#2{\relax +% acquire and store +% #1 optional output dimen register +% #2 object +\edef\@IEEEquantizeoutdimenreg{#1}\relax +% allow for object specifications that contain parameters +\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={#2}\relax +\long\edef\@IEEEquantizeobject{\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA}\relax +\@ifnextchar [{\@@@IEEEquantizevspace}{\@@@IEEEquantizevspace[\relax]}} + +\long\def\@@@IEEEquantizevspace[#1]#2{\relax +% acquire and store +% [#1] optional object decl, is \relax if not given by user +% #2 top baselineskip +% allow for object decl specifications that have parameters +\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={#1}\relax +\long\edef\@IEEEquantizeobjectdecl{\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA}\relax +\edef\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip{#2}\ivIEEEquantizevspace} + +% acquire optional argument set and store +% [offset][prevdepth][lineskip limit][lineskip] +\def\ivIEEEquantizevspace{\@ifnextchar [{\@vIEEEquantizevspace}{\@vIEEEquantizevspace[0pt]}} +\def\@vIEEEquantizevspace[#1]{\edef\@IEEEquantizeoffset{#1}\@ifnextchar [{\@viIEEEquantizevspace}{\@viIEEEquantizevspace[\prevdepth]}} +\def\@viIEEEquantizevspace[#1]{\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth=#1\relax\@ifnextchar [{\@viiIEEEquantizevspace}{\@viiIEEEquantizevspace[\lineskiplimit]}} +\def\@viiIEEEquantizevspace[#1]{\edef\@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit{#1}\@ifnextchar [{\@viiiIEEEquantizevspace}{\@viiiIEEEquantizevspace[\lineskip]}} +\def\@viiiIEEEquantizevspace[#1]{\edef\@IEEEquantizelineskip{#1}\@ixIEEEquantizevspace} + +% main routine +\def\@ixIEEEquantizevspace#1#2#3{\relax +\edef\@IEEEquantizeunitheight{#1}\relax +\edef\@IEEEquantizenomvspace{#2}\relax +\edef\@IEEEquantizeminvspace{#3}\relax +% \@IEEEquantizeoutdimenreg +% \@IEEEquantizeobject +% \@IEEEquantizeobjectdecl +% \@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip +% \@IEEEquantizeoffset +% \@IEEEquantizeprevdepth +% \@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit +% \@IEEEquantizelineskip +% \@IEEEquantizeunitheight +% \@IEEEquantizenomvspace +% \@IEEEquantizeminvspace +% get overall height of object +\setbox\@IEEEquantizeboxA\vbox{\begingroup\@IEEEquantizeobjectdecl\@IEEEquantizeobject\relax\endgroup}\relax +\@IEEEquantizeheightA\ht\@IEEEquantizeboxA\relax +% get height of first line of object +\setbox\@IEEEquantizeboxA\vtop{\begingroup\@IEEEquantizeobjectdecl\@IEEEquantizeobject\relax\endgroup}\relax +\@IEEEquantizeheightB\ht\@IEEEquantizeboxA\relax +\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth>-1000pt\relax % prevdepth > -1000pf means full baselineskip\lineskip rules in effect +% lineskip spacing rule takes effect if height of top line > baselineskip - prevdepth - lineskiplimit, +% otherwise the baselineskip rule is in effect and the height of the first line does not matter at all. +\@IEEEquantizeheightC=\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip\relax +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC-\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth\relax +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC-\@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit\relax % this works even though \@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit is a macro because TeX allows --10pt notation +\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeheightB>\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax +% lineskip spacing rule is in effect i.e., the object is going to be shifted down relative to the +% baselineskip set position by its top line height (already a part of the total height) + prevdepth + lineskip - baselineskip +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth\relax +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA\@IEEEquantizelineskip\relax +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip\relax +\else +% height of first line <= \@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip - \@IEEEquantizeprevdepth - \@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit +% standard baselineskip rules are in effect, so don't consider height of first line +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax +\fi +% +\else % prevdepth <= -1000pt, simplier \topskip type rules in effect +\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeheightB>\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip +% height of top line (already included in the total height) in excess of +% baselineskip is the amount it will be downshifted +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip\relax +\else +% height of first line is irrelevant, remove it +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax +\fi +\fi % prevdepth <= -1000pt +% +% adjust height for any manual offset +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA\@IEEEquantizeoffset\relax +% add in nominal spacer +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA\@IEEEquantizenomvspace\relax +% check for nonzero unitheight +\@IEEEquantizeheightB=\@IEEEquantizeunitheight\relax +\ifnum\@IEEEquantizeheightB=0\relax +\@IEEEclspkgerror{IEEEquantizevspace unit height cannot be zero. Assuming 10pt.}% +{Division by zero is not allowed.} +\@IEEEquantizeheightB=10pt\relax +\fi +% get integer number of lines +\@IEEEquantizemultiple=\@IEEEquantizeheightA\relax +\divide\@IEEEquantizemultiple\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax +% set A to contain the excess height over the \@IEEEquantizemultiple of lines +% A = height - multiple*unitheight +\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax +\multiply\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizemultiple\relax +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax +% set B to contain the height short of \@IEEEquantizemultiple+1 of lines +% B = unitheight - A +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightB-\@IEEEquantizeheightA\relax +% choose A or B based on which is closer +\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizenomvspace\relax +\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeheightA<\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax +% C = nomvspace - A, go with lower +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC-\@IEEEquantizeheightA\relax +\else +% C = nomvspace + B, go with upper +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax +\fi +% if violate lower bound, use next integer bound +\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeheightC<\@IEEEquantizeminvspace\relax +% A + B = unitheight +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightA\relax +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax +\fi +% export object and spacer outside of group +\global\let\@IEEEquantizeobjectout\@IEEEquantizeobject\relax +\global\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax +\endgroup +\if@IEEEquantizevspaceuseoutdimenreg +\@IEEEquantizeoutdimenreg=\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax +\else +\@IEEEquantizeobjectout\relax +\vskip\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax +\fi} + + +% user command to disable all global assignments, possible use within object decl +\def\IEEEquantizedisableglobal{\let\global\relax +\let\gdef\def +\let\xdef\edef} +% user command to allow for the disabling of \thanks and other commands, possible use within object decl +\def\IEEEquantizedisabletitlecmds{\long\def\thanks##1{\relax}\relax +\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks##1{\relax}\def\newpage{\relax}} + + @@ -3857,6 +5137,7 @@ between column types.}% % in the dynamic sizer. \let\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext=\relax \long\def\IEEEtitleabstractindextext#1{\def\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext{#1}} + % V1.7 provide a way for users to get the \@IEEEtitleabstractindextext if % not in compsoc or transmag journal mode - this way abstract and keywords % can still be placed in their conventional position if not in those modes. @@ -3864,11 +5145,17 @@ between column types.}% % display for all conference formats \ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext\relax \else% non-conferences - \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc% display if not compsoc and not transmag - \else - \ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag - \else% not compsoc journal nor transmag journal - \@IEEEtitleabstractindextext\relax + % V1.8a display for all technotes + \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext\relax + % V1.8a add diamond line after abstract and index terms for compsoc technotes + \@IEEEcompsoconly{\noindent\hfill\IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}\relax + \else % non-conferences and non-technotes + \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc% display if not compsoc and not transmag + \else + \ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag + \else% not compsoc journal nor transmag journal + \@IEEEtitleabstractindextext\relax + \fi \fi \fi \fi} @@ -3892,9 +5179,7 @@ between column types.}% % compsoc journals use \footnotesize, compsoc conferences use normalsize \@IEEEcompsoconly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize}} -\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\normalsize}} - - +\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\small}} % V1.6 have abstract and keywords strip leading spaces, pars and newlines @@ -3923,14 +5208,19 @@ between column types.}% % V1.7 compsoc keywords index terms \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference -\def\abstract{\normalfont - \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\large\abstractname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip - \if@twocolumn\else\quotation\fi\itshape\@IEEEabskeysecsize% - \par\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} -\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\vskip 1.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip - \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\large\IEEEkeywordsname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip - \if@twocolumn\else\quotation\fi\itshape\@IEEEabskeysecsize% - \par\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} +\def\abstract{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\bfseries + \if@twocolumn + \@IEEEabskeysecsize\noindent\textit{\abstractname}---\relax + \else + \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize% + \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} +\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\bfseries + \if@twocolumn + \@IEEEabskeysecsize\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip\noindent + \textit{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax + \else + \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize% + \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} \else% compsoc not conference \def\abstract{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily \if@twocolumn @@ -4119,8 +5409,8 @@ between column types.}% {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}% \else% compsoc journals % use negative top separation as compsoc journals do not indent paragraphs after section titles -\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{-3ex plus -2ex minus -1.5ex}% -{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\large\sffamily\bfseries\scshape}}% +\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{-3.5ex plus -2ex minus -1.5ex}% +{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\sublargesize\sffamily\bfseries\scshape}}% % Note that subsection and smaller may not be correct for the Computer Society, % I have to look up an example. \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{-3.5ex plus -1.5ex minus -1.5ex}% @@ -4140,6 +5430,16 @@ between column types.}% \fi +% V1.8a provide for a raised line Introduction section for use with Computer +% Society papers. We have to remove any spacing glue after the section +% heading and then remove the blank line for the new paragraph after it. +% LaTeX's section handler alters \everypar and we need to propogate those +% changes outside of the \parbox lest there be spacing problems at the top +% of the next section. +\def\IEEEraisesectionheading#1{\noindent\raisebox{1.5\baselineskip}[0pt][0pt]{\parbox[b]{\columnwidth}{#1\unskip\global\everypar=\everypar}}\vspace{-1\baselineskip}\vspace{-\parskip}\par} + + + %% ENVIRONMENTS % "box" symbols at end of proofs \def\IEEEQEDclosed{\mbox{\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{1.3ex}}} % for a filled box @@ -4171,6 +5471,27 @@ between column types.}% %\itemindent is set to \z@ by list, so define new temporary variable \newdimen\@IEEEtmpitemindent +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +% V1.8a compsoc uses bold theorem titles, a period instead of a colon, vertical spacing, and hanging indentation +% V1.8 allow long theorem names to break across lines. +% Thanks to Miquel Payaro for reporting this. +\def\@begintheorem#1#2{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\relax + \topsep 0.2\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip plus 0.26\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip minus 0.05\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip + \rmfamily\trivlist\hangindent\parindent% + \item[]\textit{\bfseries\noindent #1\ #2.} \itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent\relax} +\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\relax +\topsep 0.2\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip plus 0.26\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip minus 0.05\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip +\rmfamily\trivlist\hangindent\parindent% +% V1.6 IEEE is back to using () around theorem names which are also in italics +% Thanks to Christian Peel for reporting this. + \item[]\textit{\bfseries\noindent #1\ #2\ (#3).} \itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent\relax} +% V1.7 remove bogus \unskip that caused equations in theorems to collide with +% lines below. +\def\@endtheorem{\endtrivlist\vskip 0.25\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip plus 0.26\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip minus 0.05\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip} +\else +% +% noncompsoc +% % V1.8 allow long theorem names to break across lines. % Thanks to Miquel Payaro for reporting this. \def\@begintheorem#1#2{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\relax\topsep 0pt\rmfamily\trivlist% @@ -4182,6 +5503,9 @@ between column types.}% % V1.7 remove bogus \unskip that caused equations in theorems to collide with % lines below. \def\@endtheorem{\endtrivlist} +\fi + + % V1.6 % display command for the section the theorem is in - so that \thesection @@ -4884,21 +6208,22 @@ Use \@IEEEbackslash #2 instead.}} % provide some legacy IEEEtran commands -\def\authorblockA{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockA}{IEEEauthorblockA}\IEEEauthorblockA} -\def\authorblockN{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockN}{IEEEauthorblockN}\IEEEauthorblockN} -\def\authorrefmark{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorrefmark}{IEEEauthorrefmark}\IEEEauthorrefmark} -\def\PARstart{\@IEEElegacywarn{PARstart}{IEEEPARstart}\IEEEPARstart} -\def\pubid{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubid}{IEEEpubid}\IEEEpubid} -\def\pubidadjcol{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubidadjcol}{IEEEpubidadjcol}\IEEEpubidadjcol} -\def\specialpapernotice{\@IEEElegacywarn{specialpapernotice}{IEEEspecialpapernotice}\IEEEspecialpapernotice} \def\IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext{\@IEEElegacywarn{IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}{IEEEtitleabstractindextext}\IEEEtitleabstractindextext} \def\IEEEdisplaynotcompsoctitleabstractindextext{\@IEEElegacywarn{IEEEdisplaynotcompsoctitleabstractindextext}{IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext}\IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext} % provide some legacy IEEEtran environments -\def\keywords{\@IEEElegacywarn{keywords}{IEEEkeywords}\IEEEkeywords} -\def\endkeywords{\endIEEEkeywords} - +% V1.8a no more support for these legacy commands +%\def\authorblockA{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockA}{IEEEauthorblockA}\IEEEauthorblockA} +%\def\authorblockN{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockN}{IEEEauthorblockN}\IEEEauthorblockN} +%\def\authorrefmark{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorrefmark}{IEEEauthorrefmark}\IEEEauthorrefmark} +%\def\PARstart{\@IEEElegacywarn{PARstart}{IEEEPARstart}\IEEEPARstart} +%\def\pubid{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubid}{IEEEpubid}\IEEEpubid} +%\def\pubidadjcol{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubidadjcol}{IEEEpubidadjcol}\IEEEpubidadjcol} +%\def\specialpapernotice{\@IEEElegacywarn{specialpapernotice}{IEEEspecialpapernotice}\IEEEspecialpapernotice} +% and environments +%\def\keywords{\@IEEElegacywarn{keywords}{IEEEkeywords}\IEEEkeywords} +%\def\endkeywords{\endIEEEkeywords} % V1.8 no more support for legacy IED list commands %\let\labelindent\IEEElabelindent %\def\calcleftmargin{\@IEEElegacywarn{calcleftmargin}{IEEEcalcleftmargin}\IEEEcalcleftmargin} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtrantools.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtrantools.sty index 7f09bc81b60..278fb05fe66 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtrantools.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtrantools.sty @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ %% -%% IEEEtrantools.sty 2012/12/27 version V1.3 +%% IEEEtrantools.sty 2014/09/17 version V1.4 %% %% %% This package provides several popular and unique commands from the -%% IEEEtran.cls class (version 1.8) file. +%% IEEEtran.cls class (version 1.8a) file. %% %% The provided commands include \IEEEPARstart, \IEEEitemize, \IEEEenumerate, %% \IEEEdescription as well as the \IEEEeqnarray, \IEEEeqnarraybox family @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ %% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/ %% %% -%% Copyright (c) 2002-2012 by Michael Shell +%% Copyright (c) 2002-2014 by Michael Shell %% See: http://www.michaelshell.org/ %% for current contact information. %% @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ %%********************************************************************** -\ProvidesPackage{IEEEtrantools}[2012/12/27 V1.3 by Michael Shell] +\ProvidesPackage{IEEEtrantools}[2014/09/17 V1.4 by Michael Shell] \typeout{-- See the "IEEEtrantools_doc.txt" manual for usage information.} \typeout{-- http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/tools/} \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} @@ -78,6 +78,10 @@ }} +% hook to allow easy changeover to IEEEtran.cls/tools.sty error reporting +\def\@IEEEclspkgerror{\PackageError{IEEEtrantools}} + + % define needed flags to indicate document options \newif\if@IEEETOOLSredeflists \global\@IEEETOOLSredeflistsfalse @@ -87,9 +91,11 @@ % dimen \newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA \newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB +\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC % count \newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountA \newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountB +\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountC % token list \newtoks\@IEEEtrantmptoksA @@ -103,10 +109,792 @@ \ProcessOptions - % store the nominal value of jot \newdimen\IEEEnormaljot \IEEEnormaljot\jot\relax +% V1.4 allow for other packages that later change \jot +\AtBeginDocument{\IEEEnormaljot\jot\relax} + + + + +%% -- Command Argument Scanning Support Functions -- +% + +% usage: \@IEEEstripouterbraces*{} +% \@IEEEstripouterbraces fully expands its argument (which it then stores +% in \@IEEEstripouterbracesarg) via \edef, then removes any outer enclosing +% braces, and finally stores the result in the macro +% \@IEEEstrippedouterbraces. +% +% For example: +% \@IEEEstripouterbraces{{{{ab}c}}} +% results in: +% +% \@IEEEstripouterbracesarg ==> a macro containing {{{ab}c}} +% \@IEEEstrippedouterbraces ==> a macro containing {ab}c +% +% the *-star form,\@IEEEstripouterbraces*, does not expand the argument +% contents during processing +\def\@IEEEstripouterbraces{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEstripouterbracesdef=\def\@@IEEEstripouterbraces}{\let\@IEEEstripouterbracesdef=\edef\@@IEEEstripouterbraces}} + +\def\@@IEEEstripouterbraces#1{\@IEEEstripouterbracesdef\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg{#1}\relax +% If the macro is unchanged after being acquired as a single delimited +% argument, we know we have one sequence of tokens without any enclosing +% braces. Loop until this is true. +\loop + \expandafter\@@@IEEEstripouterbraces\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER +\ifx\@IEEEstrippedouterbraces\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg +\else + \let\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg\@IEEEstrippedouterbraces +\repeat} + +\def\@@@IEEEstripouterbraces#1\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER{\def\@IEEEstrippedouterbraces{#1}} + + + +% usage: \@IEEEextractgroup*{} +% \@IEEEextractgroup fully expands its argument (which it then stores in +% \@IEEEextractgrouparg) via \edef and then assigns the first "brace group" +% of tokens to the macro \@IEEEextractedgroup. +% The remaining groups, if any, are stored in the macro +% \@IEEEextractedgroupremain. If the argument does not contain the requisite +% groups, the respective macros will be defined to be empty. +% There is an asymmetry in that \@IEEEextractedgroup is stripped of its first +% outer grouping while \@IEEEextractedgroupremain retains even the outer +% grouping (if present) that originally identified it as a group. +% +% For example: +% \@IEEEextractgroup{{{ab}}{c{de}}} +% results in: +% +% \@IEEEextractgrouparg ==> a macro containing {{ab}}{c{de}} +% \@IEEEextractedgroup ==> a macro containing {ab} +% \@IEEEextractedgroupremain ==> a macro containing {c{de}} +% +% The *-star form, \@IEEEextractgroup*, does not expand its argument +% contents during processing. +\def\@IEEEextractgroup{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEextractgroupdef=\def\@@IEEEextractgroup}{\let\@IEEEextractgroupdef=\edef\@@IEEEextractgroup}} + +\def\@@IEEEextractgroup#1{\@IEEEextractgroupdef\@IEEEextractgrouparg{#1}\relax +% trap the case of an empty extracted group as this would cause problems with +% \@IEEEextractgroupremain's argument acquisition +\ifx\@IEEEextractgrouparg\@empty + \def\@IEEEextractedgroup{}\relax + \def\@IEEEextractedgroupremain{}\relax +\else + % We have to use some dirty tricks here. We want to insert {} around + % whatever remains after the first group so that TeX's argument scanner + % will preserve any originally enclosing braces as well as provide an + % empty argument to acquire even if there isn't a second group. + % In this first of two dirty tricks, we put a } at the end of the structure + % we are going to extract from. The \ifnum0=`{\fi keeps TeX happy to allow + % what would otherwise be an unbalanced macro definition for + % \@@IEEEextractgroup to be acceptable to it. + \ifnum0=`{\fi\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroupremain\@IEEEextractgrouparg}\relax +\fi} + +% In the second part of the dirty tricks, we insert a leading { right after +% the first group is acquired, but before the remainder is. Again, the +% \ifnum0=`}\fi keeps TeX happy during definition time, but will disappear +% during run time. +\def\@IEEEextractgroupremain#1{\def\@IEEEextractedgroup{#1}\expandafter\@@IEEEextractgroupremain\expandafter{\ifnum0=`}\fi} + +\def\@@IEEEextractgroupremain#1{\def\@IEEEextractedgroupremain{#1}} + + + +% usage: \@IEEEextracttoken*{} +% \@IEEEextracttoken fully expands its argument (which it then stores in +% \@IEEEextracttokenarg) via \edef and then the meaning of the first +% nonbrace (but including the empty group) token found is assigned via \let +% to \@IEEEextractedtoken as well as stored in the macro +% \@IEEEextractedtokenmacro. Tokens that would otherwise be discarded during +% the acquisition of the first are stored in \@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded, +% however their original relative brace nesting depths are not guaranteed to +% be preserved. +% If the argument is empty, or if a first nonbrace token does not exist (or +% is an empty group), \@IEEEextractedtoken will be \relax and +% \@IEEEextractedtokenmacro and \@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded will be empty. +% +% For example: +% \@IEEEextracttoken{{{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g}} +% results in: +% +% \@IEEEextracttokenarg ==> a macro containing {{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g} +% \@IEEEextractedtoken ==> the letter a +% \@IEEEextractedtokenmacro ==> a macro containing a +% \@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded ==> a macro containing bcd{ef}g +% +% the *-star form, \@IEEEextracttoken*, does not expand its argument +% contents during processing. +\def\@IEEEextracttoken{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEextracttokendef=\def\@@IEEEextracttoken}{\let\@IEEEextracttokendef=\edef\@@IEEEextracttoken}} + +\def\@@IEEEextracttoken#1{\@IEEEextracttokendef\@IEEEextracttokenarg{#1}\relax +\def\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded{}\relax % initialize to empty +% if the macro is unchanged after being acquired as a single undelimited argument +% with anything after it being stripped off as a delimited argument +% we know we have one token without any enclosing braces. loop until this is true. +\let\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup\@IEEEextracttokenarg +\loop + % trap case of an empty argument as this would cause a problem with + % \@@@IEEEextracttoken's first (nondelimited) argument acquisition + \ifx\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup\@empty + \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{}\relax + \else + \expandafter\@@@IEEEextracttoken\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER\relax + \fi + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup + \else + \let\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup=\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro +\repeat +% we can safely do a \let= here because there should be at most one token +% the relax is needed to handle the case of no token found +\expandafter\let\expandafter\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\relax} + +\def\@@@IEEEextracttoken#1#2\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER{\def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{#1}\relax +\def\@@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded{#2}\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter +\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter +{\expandafter\@@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded}} + + + +% usage: \@IEEEextracttokengroups*{} +% \@IEEEextracttokengroups fully expands its argument (which it then stores +% in \@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg) and then assigns the first "brace group" of +% tokens (with the outermost braces removed) to the macro +% \@IEEEextractedfirstgroup. +% The meaning of the first nonbrace (but including the empty group) token +% within this first group is assigned via \let to \@IEEEextractedfirsttoken +% as well as stored in the macro \@IEEEextractedfirsttokenmacro. If a first +% nonbrace token does not exist (or is an empty group), these will be \relax +% and empty, respectively. Tokens that would otherwise be discarded during +% the acquisition of the first token in the first group are stored in +% \@IEEEextractedfirsttokensdiscarded, however their original relative brace +% nesting depths are not guaranteed to be preserved. +% The first group within this first group is stored in the macro +% \@IEEEextractedfirstfirstgroup. +% Likewise for the next group after the first: \@IEEEextractednextgroup, +% \@IEEEextractednextfirstgroup, \@IEEEextractednextgroupfirsttoken, +% \@IEEEextractednextgroupfirsttokenmacro, and +% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttokensdiscarded. +% All tokens/groups after the first group, including any enclosing braces, +% are stored in the macro \@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain which will +% be empty if none exist. +% +% For example: +% \@IEEEextracttokengroups{{{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g}} +% will result in: +% +% \@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg ==> a macro containing {{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g} +% \@IEEEextractedfirstgroup ==> a macro containing {ab}{cd} +% \@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain ==> a macro containing {{ef}g} +% \@IEEEextractedfirsttoken ==> the letter a +% \@IEEEextractedfirsttokenmacro ==> a macro containing a +% \@IEEEextractedfirsttokensdiscarded ==> a macro containing bcd +% \@IEEEextractedfirstfirstgroup ==> a macro containing ab +% \@IEEEextractednextgroup ==> a macro containing {ef}g +% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttoken ==> the letter e +% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttokenmacro ==> a macro containing e +% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttokensdiscarded ==> a macro containing fg +% \@IEEEextractednextfirstgroup ==> a macro containing ef +% +% If given an empty argument, \@IEEEextractedfirsttoken and +% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttoken will be set to \relax +% and all the macros will be empty. +% the *-star form, \@IEEEextracttokengroups*, does not expand its argument +% contents during processing. +% +% Depends on: \@IEEEextractgroup, \@IEEEextracttoken +\def\@IEEEextracttokengroups{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEextracttokengroupsdef=\def\@@IEEEextracttokengroups}{\let\@IEEEextracttokengroupsdef=\edef\@@IEEEextracttokengroups}} +\def\@@IEEEextracttokengroups#1{\@IEEEextracttokengroupsdef\@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg{#1}\relax +% begin extraction, these functions are safe with empty arguments +% first group +\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg}\relax +\let\@IEEEextractedfirstgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup +\let\@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain\@IEEEextractedgroupremain +\expandafter\@IEEEextracttoken\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractedfirstgroup}\relax +\let\@IEEEextractedfirsttoken\@IEEEextractedtoken +\let\@IEEEextractedfirsttokenmacro\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro +\let\@IEEEextractedfirsttokensdiscarded\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded +% first first group +\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractedfirstgroup}\relax +\let\@IEEEextractedfirstfirstgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup +% next group +\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain}\relax +\let\@IEEEextractednextgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup +\expandafter\@IEEEextracttoken\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractednextgroup}\relax +\let\@IEEEextractednextfirsttoken\@IEEEextractedtoken +\let\@IEEEextractednextfirsttokenmacro\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro +\let\@IEEEextractednextfirsttokensdiscarded\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded +% next first group +\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractednextgroup}\relax +\let\@IEEEextractednextfirstgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup} + + +%% +%% -- End of Command Argument Scanning Support Functions -- + + + + +% -- page setup commands -- + +% The default sample text for calculating margins +\def\IEEEdefaultsampletext{\normalfont\normalsize gT} +\def\IEEEdefaultheadersampletext{\normalfont\normalsize T} +\def\IEEEdefaultfootersampletext{\normalfont\normalsize gT} + + + +% usage: \IEEEsettextwidth{inner margin}{outer margin} +% Sets \textwidth to allow the specified inner and outer margins +% for the current \paperwidth. +\def\IEEEsettextwidth#1#2{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\paperwidth +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB#1\relax +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB#2\relax +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB +\textwidth\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA} + + + +% usage: \IEEEsetsidemargin{mode: i, o, c, a}{margin/offset} +% Sets \oddsidemargin and \evensidemargin to yield the specified margin +% of the given mode. +% The available modes are: +% i = inner margin +% o = outer margin +% c = centered, with the given offset +% a = adjust the margins using the given offset +% For the offsets, positive values increase the inner margin. +% \textwidth should be set properly for the given margins before calling this +% function. +\def\IEEEsetsidemargin#1#2{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #2\relax +\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax +% check for mode errors +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak + Defaulting to `i'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space are: i, o, c and a.}\relax + \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=i\relax + \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{i}\relax +\else + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else + \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax + \fi +\fi +% handle each mode +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax + \advance\oddsidemargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +\else +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax + \oddsidemargin\paperwidth + \advance\oddsidemargin by -\textwidth + \divide\oddsidemargin by 2\relax + \advance\oddsidemargin by -1in\relax + \advance\oddsidemargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +\else +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken o\relax + \oddsidemargin\paperwidth + \advance\oddsidemargin by -\textwidth + \advance\oddsidemargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA + \advance\oddsidemargin by -1in\relax +\else + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken i\relax + \else + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak + Defaulting to `i'}% + {Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space are: i, o, c and a.}% + \fi + \oddsidemargin\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA + \advance\oddsidemargin by -1in\relax +\fi\fi\fi +% odd and even side margins both mean "inner" for single sided pages +\evensidemargin\oddsidemargin +% but are mirrors of each other when twosided is in effect +\if@twoside + \evensidemargin\paperwidth + \advance\evensidemargin by -\textwidth + \advance\evensidemargin by -\oddsidemargin + % have to compensate for both the builtin 1in LaTex offset + % and the fact we already subtracted this offset from \oddsidemargin + \advance\evensidemargin -2in\relax +\fi} + + + +% usage: \IEEEsettextheight[sample text]{top text margin}{bottom text margin} +% Sets \textheight based on the specified top margin and bottom margin. +% Takes into consideration \paperheight, \topskip, and (by default) the +% the actual height and depth of the \IEEEdefaultsampletext text. +\def\IEEEsettextheight{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsettextheight}{\@IEEEsettextheight[\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}} +\def\@IEEEsettextheight[#1]#2#3{\textheight\paperheight\relax + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #2\relax + \advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% subtract top margin + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #3\relax + \advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% subtract bottom margin + \advance \textheight by \topskip% add \topskip + % subtract off everything above the top, and below the bottom, baselines + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA} + + + +\newdimen\IEEEquantizedlength +\IEEEquantizedlength 0sp\relax +\newdimen\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff +\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff 0sp\relax +\def\IEEEquantizedlengthint{0} + +% usage: \IEEEquantizelength{mode: d, c, i}{base unit}{length} +% Sets the length \IEEEquantizedlength to be an integer multiple of the given +% (nonzero) base unit such that \IEEEquantizedlength approximates the given +% length. +% \IEEEquantizedlengthdiff is a length equal to the difference between the +% \IEEEquantizedlength and the given length. +% \IEEEquantizedlengthint is a macro containing the integer number of base units +% in \IEEEquantizedlength. +% i.e., \IEEEquantizedlength = \IEEEquantizedlengthint * base unit +% The mode determines how \IEEEquantizedlength is quantized: +% d = always decrease (always round down \IEEEquantizeint) +% c = use the closest match +% i = always increase (always round up \IEEEquantizeint) +% In anycase, if the given length is already quantized, +% \IEEEquantizedlengthdiff will be set to zero. +\def\IEEEquantizelength#1#2#3{\begingroup +% work in isolation so as not to externally disturb the \@IEEEtrantmp +% variables +% load the argument values indirectly via \IEEEquantizedlengthdiff +% in case the user refers to our \@IEEEtrantmpdimenX, \IEEEquantizedlength, +% etc. in the arguments. we also will work with these as counters, +% i.e., in sp units +% A has the base unit +\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff #2\relax\relax\relax\relax +\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff +% B has the input length +\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff #3\relax\relax\relax\relax +\@IEEEtrantmpcountB\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA sp\relax +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountB sp\relax +% \@IEEEtrantmpcountC will have the quantized int +% \IEEEquantizedlength will have the quantized length +% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC will have the quantized diff +% initialize them to zero as this is what will be +% exported if an error occurs +\@IEEEtrantmpcountC 0\relax +\IEEEquantizedlength 0sp\relax +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC 0sp\relax +% extract mode +\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax +% check for mode errors +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEquantizelength\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak + Defaulting to `d'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEquantizelength\space are: d, c and i.}\relax + \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=d\relax + \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{d}\relax +\else + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else + \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEquantizelength\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax + \fi +\fi +% check for base unit is zero error +\ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=0\relax +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Base unit is zero in \string\IEEEquantizelength\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak + \string\IEEEquantizedlength\space and \string\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff\space are set to zero}{Division by zero is not allowed.}\relax +\else% base unit is nonzero + % \@IEEEtrantmpcountC carries the number of integer units + % in the quantized length (integer length \ base) + \@IEEEtrantmpcountC\@IEEEtrantmpcountB\relax + \divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax + % \IEEEquantizedlength has the (rounded down) quantized length + % = base * int + \IEEEquantizedlength\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax + \multiply\IEEEquantizedlength by \@IEEEtrantmpcountC\relax + % \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC has the difference + % = quantized length - length + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\IEEEquantizedlength\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax + % trap special case of length being already quantized + % to avoid a roundup under i option + \ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC=0sp\relax + \else % length not is already quantized + % set dimenA to carry the upper quantized (absolute value) difference: + % quantizedlength + base - length + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \IEEEquantizedlength\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax + % set dimenB to carry the lower quantized (absolute value) difference: + % length - quantizedlength + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\IEEEquantizedlength\relax + % handle each mode + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax + % compare upper and lower amounts, select upper if lower > upper + \ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB>\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax + % use upper + \advance\IEEEquantizedlength by \the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA sp\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by 1\relax + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA + \else% <=. uselower + % no need to do anything for lower, use output values already setup + \fi + \else% not mode c + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken i\relax + % always round up under i mode + \advance\IEEEquantizedlength by \the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA sp\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by 1\relax + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA + \else + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken d\relax + \else + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEquantizelength\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak + Defaulting to `d'}% + {Valid modes for \string\IEEEquantizelength\space are: d, c, and i.}\relax + \fi % if d + % no need to do anything for d, use output values already setup + \fi\fi % if i, c + \fi % if length is already quantized +\fi% if base unit is zero +% globally assign the results to macros we use here to escape the enclosing +% group without needing to call \global on any of the \@IEEEtrantmp variables. +% \@IEEEtrantmpcountC has the quantized int +% \IEEEquantizedlength has the quantized length +% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC has the quantized diff +\xdef\@IEEEquantizedlengthintmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax +\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlength\relax +\xdef\@IEEEquantizedlengthmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax +\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\relax +\xdef\@IEEEquantizedlengthdiffmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax +\endgroup +% locally assign the outputs here from the macros +\expandafter\IEEEquantizedlength\@IEEEquantizedlengthmacro sp\relax +\expandafter\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff\@IEEEquantizedlengthdiffmacro sp\relax +\edef\IEEEquantizedlengthint{\@IEEEquantizedlengthintmacro}\relax} + + + +\newdimen\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff +\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff 0sp\relax + +% usage: \IEEEquantizetextheight[base unit]{mode: d, c, i} +% Sets \textheight to be an integer multiple of the current \baselineskip +% (or the optionally specified base unit) plus the first (\topskip) line. +% \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff is a length equal to the difference between +% the new quantized and original \textheight. +% \IEEEquantizedtextheightlpc is a macro containing the integer number of +% lines per column under the quantized \textheight. i.e., +% \textheight = \IEEEquantizedtextheightlpc * \baselineskip + \topskip +% The mode determines how \textheight is quantized: +% d = always decrease (always round down the number of lines per column) +% c = use the closest match +% i = always increase (always round up the number of lines per column) +% In anycase, if \textheight is already quantized, it will remain unchanged, +% and \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff will be set to zero. +% Depends on: \IEEEquantizelength +\def\IEEEquantizetextheight{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEquantizetextheight}{\@IEEEquantizetextheight[\baselineskip]}} +\def\@IEEEquantizetextheight[#1]#2{\begingroup +% use our \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff as a scratch pad +% we need to subtract off \topskip before quantization +\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff\textheight +\advance\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff by -\topskip\relax +\IEEEquantizelength{#2}{#1}{\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff} +% add back \topskip line +\advance\IEEEquantizedlength by \topskip +\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlengthint\relax +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by 1\relax +% globally assign the results to macros we use here to escape the enclosing +% group without needing to call \global on any of the \@IEEEtrantmp variables. +\xdef\@IEEEquantizedtextheightlpcmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax +\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlength\relax +\xdef\@IEEEquantizedtextheightmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax +\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff\relax +\xdef\@IEEEquantizedtextheightdiffmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax +\endgroup +% locally assign the outputs here from the macros +\textheight\@IEEEquantizedtextheightmacro sp\relax +\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff\@IEEEquantizedtextheightdiffmacro sp\relax +\edef\IEEEquantizedtextheightlpc{\@IEEEquantizedtextheightlpcmacro}} + + + +% usage: \IEEEsettopmargin[sample text]{mode: t, b, c, a, q}{margin/offset} +% Sets \topmargin based on the specified vertical margin. +% Takes into consideration the base 1in offset, \headheight, \headsep, +% \topskip, and (by default) the the actual height (or, for the bottom, depth) +% of the \IEEEdefaultsampletext text. +% The available modes are: +% t = top margin +% b = bottom margin +% c = vertically centered, with the given offset +% a = adjust the vertical margins using the given offset +% q = adjust the margins using \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff and the given offset +% For the offsets, positive values increase the top margin. +% \headheight, \headsep, \topskip and \textheight should be set properly for the +% given margins before calling this function. +\def\IEEEsettopmargin{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsettopmargin}{\@IEEEsettopmargin[\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}} +\def\@IEEEsettopmargin[#1]#2#3{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #3\relax +\@IEEEextracttoken{#2}\relax +% check for mode errors +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak + Defaulting to `t'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space are: t, b, c, a and q.}\relax + \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=t\relax + \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{t}\relax +\else + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else + \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax + \fi +\fi +% handle each mode +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax + \advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +\else +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken q\relax + % we need to adjust by half the \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff value + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff\relax + \divide\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by 2\relax + % a positive \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff means we need to reduce \topmargin + % because \textheight has been lenghtened + \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax + \advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +\else +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax + \topmargin\paperheight + \advance\topmargin by -\textheight + % \textheight includes \topskip, but we should not count topskip whitespace here, backout + \advance \topmargin by \topskip + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax + \divide\topmargin by 2\relax + \advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +\else +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken b\relax + \topmargin\paperheight + \advance\topmargin by -\textheight + % \textheight includes \topskip, but we should not count topskip whitespace here, backout + \advance \topmargin by \topskip + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax + \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +\else + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax + \else + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak + Defaulting to `t'}% + {Valid modes for \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space are: t, b, c, a and q.}\relax + \fi + \topmargin\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax +\fi\fi % if t, b, c +% convert desired top margin into actual \topmargin +% this is not done for the q or a modes because they are only adjustments +\advance \topmargin by -\topskip +\advance \topmargin by -1in +\advance \topmargin by -\headheight +\advance \topmargin by -\headsep +\fi\fi % if q, a +} + + + +% usage: \IEEEsetheadermargin[header sample][text sample]{mode: t, b, c, a}{margin/offset} +% Differentially adjusts \topmargin and \headsep (such that their sum is unchanged) +% based on the specified header margin. +% Takes into consideration the base 1in offset, \headheight, \topskip, and (by default) +% the actual height (or depth) of the \IEEEdefaultheadersampletext and +% \IEEEdefaultsampletext text. +% The available modes are: +% t = top margin (top of the header text to the top of the page) +% b = bottom margin (bottom of the header text to the top of the main text) +% c = vertically centered between the main text and the top of the page, +% with the given offset +% a = adjust the vertical position using the given offset +% For the offsets, positive values move the header downward. +% \headheight, \headsep, \topskip and \topmargin should be set properly before +% calling this function. +\def\IEEEsetheadermargin{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsetheadermargin}{\@IEEEsetheadermargin[\IEEEdefaultheadersampletext]}} +\def\@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1]{\@ifnextchar [{\@@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1]}{\@@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1][\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}} +\def\@@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1][#2]#3#4{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #4\relax +\@IEEEextracttoken{#3}\relax +% check for mode errors +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak + Defaulting to `t'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space are: t, b, c, and a.}\relax + \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=t\relax + \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{t}\relax +\else + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else + \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax + \fi +\fi +% handle each mode +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax + % No need to do anything here and can pass through the adjustment + % value as is. The end adjustment of \topmargin and \headsep will + % do all that is needed +\else +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax + % get the bottom margin + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \topskip + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual header bottom margin + % subtract from it the top header margin + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB -1in\relax % take into consideration the system 1in offset of the top margin + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\topmargin + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\headheight + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the difference between the bottom and top margins + % we need to adjust by half this amount to center the header + \divide\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by 2\relax + % and add to offset + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB +\else +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken b\relax + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \topskip + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual header bottom margin + % get the difference between the actual and the desired + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB +\else + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax + \else + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak + Defaulting to `t'}% + {Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space are: t, b, c and a.}\relax + \fi + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 1in\relax % take into consideration the system 1in offset of the top margin + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \topmargin + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \headheight + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual header top margin + % get the difference between the desired and the actual + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB +\fi\fi % if t, b, c +\fi % if a +% advance \topmargin by the needed amount and reduce \headsep by the same +% so as not to disturb the location of the main text +\advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +\advance\headsep by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +} + + + +% usage: \IEEEsetfootermargin[footer sample][text sample]{mode: t, b, c, a}{margin/offset} +% Adjusts \footskip based on the specified footer margin. +% Takes into consideration the base 1in offset, \paperheight, \headheight, +% \headsep, \textheight and (by default) the actual height (or depth) of the +% \IEEEdefaultfootersampletext and \IEEEdefaultsampletext text. +% The available modes are: +% t = top margin (top of the footer text to the bottom of the main text) +% b = bottom margin (bottom of the footer text to the bottom of page) +% c = vertically centered between the main text and the bottom of the page, +% with the given offset +% a = adjust the vertical position using the given offset +% For the offsets, positive values move the footer downward. +% \headheight, \headsep, \topskip, \topmargin, and \textheight should be set +% properly before calling this function. +\def\IEEEsetfootermargin{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsetfootermargin}{\@IEEEsetfootermargin[\IEEEdefaultfootersampletext]}} +\def\@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1]{\@ifnextchar [{\@@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1]}{\@@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1][\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}} +\def\@@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1][#2]#3#4{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #4\relax +\@IEEEextracttoken{#3}\relax +% check for mode errors +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak + Defaulting to `t'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space are: t, b, c, and a.}\relax + \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=t\relax + \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{t}\relax +\else + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else + \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax + \fi +\fi +% handle each mode +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax + % No need to do anything here and can pass through the adjustment + % value as is. The end adjustment of \footskip will do all that + % is needed +\else +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax + % calculate the bottom margin + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 1in\relax % system 1in offset + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\topmargin\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headheight\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\textheight\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\footskip\relax + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\paperheight + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual footer bottom margin + % now subtract off the footer top margin + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB -\footskip\relax + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the difference between the bottom + % and top footer margins + % our adjustment must be half this value to center the footer + \divide\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by 2\relax + % add to the offset + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB +\else +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken b\relax + % calculate the bottom margin + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 1in\relax % system 1in offset + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\topmargin\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headheight\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\textheight\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\footskip\relax + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\paperheight + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual footer bottom margin + % get the difference between the actual and the desired + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB +\else + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax + \else + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak + Defaulting to `t'}% + {Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space are: t, b, c and a.}\relax + \fi + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\footskip\relax + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual footer top margin + % get the difference between the desired and the actual + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB +\fi\fi % if t, b, c +\fi % if a +% advance \footskip by the needed amount +\advance\footskip by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +} + + +% -- End page setup commands -- + + % Itemize, Enumerate and Description (IED) List Controls @@ -538,9 +1326,6 @@ %% I don't make the claim that my work here is even near their calibre. ;) -% hook to allow easy changeover to IEEEtran.cls/tools.sty error reporting -\def\@IEEEclspkgerror{\ClassError{IEEEtran}} - \newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojot% flag to indicate if the environment was called as the star form \@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojotfalse @@ -1189,7 +1974,7 @@ Using a default centering column instead}% #1\relax% allow user to override defaults \let\\\@IEEEeqnarraycr% replace newline with one that can put in eqn. numbers \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@% col. count = 0 for first line - \@IEEEbuildpreamble #2\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA + \@IEEEbuildpreamble{#2}\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA % put in the column for the equation number \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first \toks0={##}% @@ -1384,7 +2169,7 @@ $$\@ignoretrue} \IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides #1\relax% allow user to override defaults \let\\\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr% replace newline with one that allows optional spacing - \@IEEEbuildpreamble #4\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA + \@IEEEbuildpreamble{#4}\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA % add an isolation column to the preamble to stop \\'s {} from getting into the last col \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first \toks0={##}% @@ -1395,16 +2180,15 @@ $$\@ignoretrue} % begin the alignment \everycr{}% % use only the very first token to determine the positioning - % this stops some problems when the user uses more than one letter, - % but is probably not worth the effort - % \noindent is used as a delimiter - \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% - \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#2\relax\relax\noindent - % \@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded + \@IEEEextracttoken{#2}\relax + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else + \typeout{** WARNING: IEEEeqnarraybox position specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax + \fi + % \@IEEEextractedtoken has the first token, the rest are ignored % if we need to put things into and hbox and go into math mode, do so now \if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW \leavevmode \hbox \bgroup $\fi% % use the appropriate vbox type - \if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken t\relax\vtop\else\if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken c\relax% + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax\vtop\else\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax% \vcenter\else\vbox\fi\fi\bgroup% \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines \ifx#3\relax\halign\else\halign to #3\relax\fi% @@ -1452,8 +2236,10 @@ $$\@ignoretrue} -% starts the halign preamble build -\def\@IEEEbuildpreamble{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register +% usage: \@IEEEbuildpreamble{column specifiers} +% starts the halign preamble build +% the assembled preamble is put in \@IEEEtrantmptoksA +\def\@IEEEbuildpreamble#1{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register \let\@IEEEBPcurtype=u%current column type is not yet known \let\@IEEEBPprevtype=s%the previous column type was the start \let\@IEEEBPnexttype=u%next column type is not yet known @@ -1469,17 +2255,19 @@ $$\@ignoretrue} % record the default end glues \edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart}% \edef\@IEEEBPendglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend}% +\edef\@IEEEedefMACRO{#1}\relax% fully expand the preamble to support macro containers % now parse the user's column specifications -\@@IEEEbuildpreamble} +% \ignorespaces is used as a delimiter, need at least one trailing \relax because +% \@@IEEEbuildpreamble looks into the future +\expandafter\@@IEEEbuildpreamble\@IEEEedefMACRO\ignorespaces\relax\relax} +% usage: \@@IEEEbuildpreamble{current column}{next column} % parses and builds the halign preamble \def\@@IEEEbuildpreamble#1#2{\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEbuildpreamble% % use only the very first token to check the end -% \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here -\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% -\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent -\ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEfinishpreamble\else% +\@IEEEextracttokengroups{#1}\relax +\ifx\@IEEEextractedfirsttoken\ignorespaces\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEfinishpreamble\else% % identify current and next token type \@IEEEgetcoltype{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurtype}{1}% current, error on invalid \@IEEEgetcoltype{#2}{\@IEEEBPnexttype}{0}% next, no error on invalid next @@ -1499,8 +2287,10 @@ $$\@ignoretrue} \fi\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble{#2}} +% usage: \@@IEEEfinishpreamble{discarded} % executed just after preamble build is completed % warn about zero cols, and if prevtype type = u, put in end tabskip glue +% argument is not used \def\@@IEEEfinishpreamble#1{\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols<1\relax \@IEEEclspkgerror{No column specifiers declared for IEEEeqnarray}% {At least one column type must be declared for each IEEEeqnarray.}% @@ -1509,42 +2299,44 @@ $$\@ignoretrue} \if\@IEEEBPprevtype u\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue}\fi} -% Identify and return the column specifier's type code -\def\@IEEEgetcoltype#1#2#3{% -% use only the very first token to determine the type -% \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here -\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% -\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent -% \@IEEEgrabfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded +% usage: \@IEEEgetcoltype{col specifier}{\output}{error more} +% Identify and return the column specifier's type code in the given +% \output macro: % n = number % g = glue (any other char in catagory 12) % c = letter -% e = \end +% e = \ignorespaces (end of sequence) % u = undefined -% third argument: 0 = no error message, 1 = error on invalid char +% error mode: 0 = no error message, 1 = error on invalid char +\def\@IEEEgetcoltype#1#2#3{% +% use only the very first token to determine the type +\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax +% \@IEEEextractedtoken has the first token, the rest are discarded \let#2=u\relax% assume invalid until know otherwise -\ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let#2=e\else -\ifcat\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\relax\else% screen out control sequences -\if0\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else -\if1\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else -\if2\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else -\if3\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else -\if4\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else -\if5\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else -\if6\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else -\if7\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else -\if8\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else -\if9\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else -\ifcat,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=g\relax -\else\ifcat a\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=c\relax\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtoken\ignorespaces\let#2=e\else +\ifcat\@IEEEextractedtoken\relax\else% screen out control sequences +\if0\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else +\if1\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else +\if2\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else +\if3\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else +\if4\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else +\if5\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else +\if6\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else +\if7\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else +\if8\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else +\if9\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else +\ifcat,\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=g\relax +\else\ifcat a\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=c\relax\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi \if#2u\relax \if0\noexpand#3\relax\else\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid character in column specifications}% {Only letters, numerals and certain other symbols are allowed \MessageBreak as IEEEeqnarray column specifiers.}\fi\fi} -% identify the current letter referenced column -% if invalid, use a default column +% usage: \@IEEEgetcurcol{col specifier} +% verify the letter referenced column exists +% and return its name in \@IEEEBPcurcolname +% if column specifier is invalid, use the default column @IEEEdefault \def\@IEEEgetcurcol#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined% \def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{#1}\else% invalid column name \@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#1" in column specifications.\MessageBreak @@ -1553,7 +2345,9 @@ Using a default centering column instead}% \def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}\fi} -% identify and return the predefined (punctuation) glue value +% usage: \@IEEEgetcurglue{glue specifier}{\output} +% identify the predefined (punctuation) glue value +% and return it in the given output macro \def\@IEEEgetcurglue#1#2{% % ! = \! (neg small) -0.16667em (-3/18 em) % , = \, (small) 0.16667em ( 3/18 em) @@ -1571,10 +2365,10 @@ Using a default centering column instead}% % value for 1em. % % use only the very first token to determine the type -% this prevents errant tokens from getting in the main text -% \noindent is used as a delimiter here -\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% -\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent +\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else + \typeout{** WARNING: IEEEeqnarray predefined inter-column glue type specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax +\fi % get the math font 1em value % LaTeX2e's NFSS2 does not preload the fonts, but \IEEEeqnarray needs % to gain access to the math (\textfont2) font's spacing parameters. @@ -1587,18 +2381,18 @@ Using a default centering column instead}% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\fontdimen6\textfont2\relax% % identify the glue value based on the first token % we discard anything after the first -\if!\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=-0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else -\if,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else -\if:\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.22222\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else -\if;\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.27778\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else -\if'\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else -\if"\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else -\if.\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.5\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else -\if/\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\the\arraycolsep}\else -\if?\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else -\if *\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{0pt plus 1fil minus 0pt}\else -\if+\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}\else -\if-\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}\else +\if!\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=-0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if,\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if:\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.22222\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if;\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.27778\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if'\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if"\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if.\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.5\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if/\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{\the\arraycolsep}\else +\if?\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if *\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{0pt plus 1fil minus 0pt}\else +\if+\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}\else +\if-\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}\else \edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% \@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid predefined inter-column glue type "#1" in\MessageBreak column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak @@ -1607,7 +2401,7 @@ column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} - +% usage: \@IEEEprocessNcol{digit} % process a numerical digit from the column specification % and look up the corresponding user defined glue value % can transform current type from n to g or a as the user defined glue is acquired @@ -1958,10 +2752,9 @@ between column types.}% \def\@IEEElegacywarn#1#2{\typeout{** ATTENTION: \@IEEEbackslash #1 is deprecated (line \the\inputlineno). Use \@IEEEbackslash #2 instead.}} -% provide for legacy commands -\def\PARstart{\@IEEElegacywarn{PARstart}{IEEEPARstart}\IEEEPARstart} -% V1.3 no longer support legacy IED list commands +% V1.4 no longer support these legacy commands +% \def\PARstart{\@IEEElegacywarn{PARstart}{IEEEPARstart}\IEEEPARstart} % \let\labelindent\IEEElabelindent % \def\calcleftmargin{\@IEEElegacywarn{calcleftmargin}{IEEEcalcleftmargin}\IEEEcalcleftmargin} % \def\setlabelwidth{\@IEEElegacywarn{setlabelwidth}{IEEEsetlabelwidth}\IEEEsetlabelwidth} |